HAMMA RADIOSTA


SUBMITTED BY: Guest

DATE: Jan. 17, 2014, 11:29 p.m.

FORMAT: Text only

SIZE: 363.1 kB

HITS: 948

  1. NZ Amateur Radio Certificate Block Course Study Notes
  2. www.nzart.org.nz
  3. 13/2/2013
  4. Contents
  5. 4 – Introduction
  6. 6 – Section 1 Regulations
  7. 17 – Question File 1 Regulations
  8. 29 – Section 2 Frequencies
  9. 30 – Question File 2 Frequencies
  10. 34 – Section 3 Electronic Fundamentals
  11. 36 – Question File 3 Electronic Fundamentals
  12. 40 – Section 4 Measurement
  13. 41 – Question File 4 Measurement
  14. 43 – Section 5 Ohms Law
  15. 44 – Question File 5 Ohms Law
  16. 48 – Section 6 Resistance
  17. 51 – Question File 6 Resistance
  18. 57 – Section 7 Power Calculations
  19. 58 – Question File 7 Power Calculations
  20. 62 – Section 8 AC Current
  21. 63 – Question File 8 AC Current
  22. 65 – Section 9 Capacitance, Inductance, Resonance
  23. 67 – Question File 9 Capacitance Inductance and Resonance 71 – Section 10 Safety
  24. 73 – Question File 10 Safety
  25. 75 – Section 11 Semiconductors
  26. 76 – Question File 11 Semiconductors
  27. 80 – Section 12 Device Recognition
  28. 81 – Question File 12 Device Recognition
  29. 84 – Section 13 Measurement
  30. 85 – Question File 13 Measurement
  31. 87 – Section 14 Decibels
  32. 88 – Question File 14 Decibels
  33. 90 – Section 15 HF Setup
  34. 92 – Question File 15 HF Setup
  35. 96 – Section 16 Receiver Block Diagrams
  36. 2
  37. 101 – Question File 16 Receiver Block Diagrams 107 – Section 17 Receivers
  38. 108 – Question File 17 Receivers
  39. 113 – Section 18 Transmitter Block Diagrams
  40. 115 – Question File 18 transmitter Block Diagrams 121 – Section 19 Transmitter Theory
  41. 121 – Question File 19 Transmitter Theory 123 – Section 20 Harmonics / Parasitics
  42. 124 – Question File 20 Harmonics / Parasitics 128 – Section 21 Power Supplies
  43. 133 – Question File 21 Power Supplies
  44. 135 – Section 22 Power Supply Regulation
  45. 137 – Question File 22 Power Supply Regulation 140 – Section 23 Operating Procedures
  46. 151 – Question File 23 Operating Procedures 154 – Section 24 Practical Operating
  47. 158 – Question File 24 practical Operating
  48. 162 – Section 25 Q Codes
  49. 163 – Question File 25 Q Codes
  50. 165 – Section 26 Transmission Lines
  51. 171 – Question File 26 Transmission Lines
  52. 175 – Section 27 Antennas
  53. 180 – Question File 27 Antennas
  54. 187 – Section 28 Propagation
  55. 191 – Question File 28 Propagation
  56. 199 – Section 29 Interference / Filtering
  57. 213 – Question File 29 Interference / Filtering 218 – Section 30 Digital Modes
  58. 222 – Question File 30 Digital Modes
  59. 224 – Sample Exam
  60. 238 – Sample Exam Answers
  61. 239 – Question Pool Answers
  62. 3
  63. Day 1 0830 - 0900 0900 - 0930 0930 - 1000 1000 - 1020 1020 - 1100 1100 - 1130 1130 - 1200 1200 - 1230 1230 - 1300 1300 - 1330 1330 - 1400 1400 - 1430 1430 - 1500 1500 - 1520 1520 - 1600 1600 - 1630 1630 - 1700 1700 - 1730
  64. Break
  65. Lunch
  66. Break
  67. Maths / Science DXer
  68. Home Brewer
  69. Day 2 0830 - 0900 0900 - 0930 0930 - 1000 1000 - 1020 1020 - 1100 1100 - 1130 1130 - 1200 1200 - 1230 1230 - 1300 1300 - 1330 1330 - 1400 1400 - 1430 1430 - 1500 1500 - 1520 1520 - 1600 1600 - 1630 1630 - 1700 1700 - 1730
  70. Own time 1
  71. 2
  72. 25
  73. Break
  74. Lunch
  75. Break Exam Exam Exam
  76. Regulations Frequencies Q Code
  77. 4
  78. INTRODUCTION
  79. All 600 questions used in the New Zealand Amateur Radio Examination are here with the Syllabus and other details.
  80. The New Zealand regulatory requirements are explained in the booklet “The New Rules Explained”, also available from NZART and from the website.
  81. Many overseas books cover the details in the other topics of the Syllabus. Borrow or buy them.
  82. Contact your local NZART Branch when you are ready for the examination. An examination can be arranged for you at a mutually-agreed time and place.
  83. If you have access to a computer, visit the NZART web site at: http//www.nzart.org.nz for examination information including a Study Guide for all parts of the syllabus.
  84. Good luck with your studies, we'll 'see you on the air'!
  85. Proposed Block Course Timetable
  86. 3 Electronics
  87. 4 Measurement
  88. 15 HF Station
  89. 23 Operating
  90. 24 Operating 2
  91. 12 Devices
  92. 5 Ohms Law
  93. 7 Power Law
  94. 10 Safety
  95. 13 Meters
  96. 26 Transmission Lines
  97. 27 Antennas
  98. 16 Receivers
  99. 17 Receivers 2
  100. 6 Resistance
  101. 8 AC Theory
  102. 9 Resonance
  103. 21 PSU
  104. 22 Reg PSU
  105. 14 dBs
  106. 28 Propagation
  107. 29 Interference
  108. 30 Digi modes
  109. 18 Transmitters
  110. 19 Transmitters 2
  111. 20 harmonics
  112. 11 Semis
  113. Yellow
  114. Cyan
  115. Pink
  116. 5
  117. General Amateur Operator’s Certificate Prescription
  118. An applicant will demonstrate by way of written examination a theoretical knowledge of:-
  119. o the legal framework of New Zealand radiocommunications
  120. o the methods of radiocommunication, including radiotelephony,
  121. radiotelegraphy, data and image
  122. o radio system theory, including theory relating to transmitters, receivers,
  123. antennas, propagation and measurements
  124. o electromagnetic radiation
  125. o electromagnetic compatibility
  126. o avoidance and resolution of radio frequency interference.
  127. Amateur Examination Procedure and Format
  128. There are thirty study topics. Each contains a multiple of ten questions.
  129. The examination questions are taken from a question-bank of 600 questions. All
  130. questions are in the public domain.
  131. One question out of every ten questions is randomly selected from each topic to
  132. make up each examination paper. Each examination paper has 60 questions and is
  133. unique.
  134. A description of each topic follows in number sequence. The number of questions
  135. which will be selected for each examination paper is shown in brackets.
  136. The total number of questions in each topic is ten times the number to be selected
  137. from it.
  138. Section 1
  139. 6
  140. REGULATIONS QUESTIONS - A Summary
  141. The Amateur Service may be briefly defined as: a radiocommunication service for the
  142. purpose of self-training, intercommunication and technical investigation
  143. The organisation responsible for the International Radio Regulations is the: International Telecommunication Union
  144. New Zealand's views on international radio regulatory matters are coordinated by the:
  145. Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment (MBIE)
  146. For regulatory purposes the world is divided into regions each with different radio spectrum allocations. New Zealand is in: Region 3
  147. The prime document for the administration of the Amateur Service in New Zealand is the:
  148. New Zealand Radiocommunications Regulations
  149. The administration of the Amateur Service in New Zealand is by: the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment Radio Spectrum Management Group
  150. An Amateur Station is a station: in the Amateur Service
  151. An amateur radio licence can be inspected by an authorised officer from the Ministry of
  152. Economic Development: at any time
  153. The fundamental regulations controlling the Amateur Service are to be found in: the
  154. International Radio Regulations from the ITU
  155. You must have an amateur radio licence to: transmit in bands allocated to the Amateur Service
  156. A New Zealand amateur radio licence allows you to operate: anywhere in New Zealand and in any other country that recognises the licence
  157. With an amateur radio licence, you may operate transmitters in your station: any number at one time
  158. You must keep the following document at your amateur station: your amateur radio licence with its attached schedule
  159. An Amateur Station is one which is: licensed by the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment to operate on the amateur radio bands
  160. 
  161. 7
  162. If the licensed operator of an amateur radio station is absent overseas, the home station may be used by: any person with an appropriate amateur radio licence
  163. All amateur stations, regardless of the mode of transmission used, must be equipped with:
  164. a reliable means for determining the operating radio frequency
  165. An amateur station may transmit unidentified signals: never, such transmissions are not permitted
  166. You may operate your amateur radio station somewhere in New Zealand away from the location entered on your licence for short periods: whenever you want to
  167. Before operating an amateur station in a motor vehicle, you must: hold a current amateur radio licence
  168. An applicant for a New Zealand amateur radio licence must first qualify by meeting the appropriate examination requirements. Application may then be made by: anyone
  169. An amateur radio licensee must have a current New Zealand postal mailing address so the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment: can send mail to the licensee
  170. If you transmit from another amateur's station, the person responsible for its proper operation is: you, the operator
  171. Your responsibility as a station licensee is that you must: be responsible for the proper operation of the station in accordance with the Radiocommunications Regulations
  172. An amateur station must have a licensed operator: whenever the station is used for transmitting
  173. A log-book for recording stations worked: is recommended for all amateur radio operators
  174. Unlicensed persons in your family cannot transmit using your amateur station if they are alone with your equipment because they must: be licensed before they are allowed to be operators
  175. Amateur radio repeater frequencies in New Zealand are coordinated by: the NZART Frequency Management and Technical Advisory Group.
  176. A licensee of an amateur radio station may permit anyone to: pass brief messages of a personal nature provided no fees or other considerations are requested or accepted
  177. The minimum age for a person to hold a licence in the Amateur Service is: there is no age limit
  178. 
  179. 8
  180. If you contact another station and your signal is strong and perfectly readable, you should:
  181. reduce your transmitter power output to the minimum needed to maintain contact
  182. The age when an amateur radio operator is required to surrender the licence is: there is no age limit
  183. Peak envelope power (PEP) output is the: average power output at the crest of the modulating cycle
  184. The maximum power output permitted from an amateur station is: specified in the schedule attached to the amateur radio licence
  185. The transmitter power output for amateur stations at all times is: the minimum power necessary to communicate and within the terms of the licence
  186. You identify your amateur station by transmitting your: callsign
  187. 2
  188. This callsign could be allocated to an amateur radio operator in New Zealand: (E.G).
  189. ZL2HF
  190. The callsign of a New Zealand amateur radio station: is listed in the administration's database
  191. These letters are used for the first letters in New Zealand amateur radio callsigns: ZL
  192. The figures normally used in New Zealand amateur radio callsigns are: a single digit, 1
  193. through 4
  194. Before re-issuing, the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment normally keeps a relinquished callsign for: 1 year
  195. An amateur radio station licence authorises the use of: amateur radio transmitting apparatus only
  196. New Zealand amateur radio licences are issued by the: Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment (MBIE)
  197. To replace your lost amateur radio certificate, you must: log on to SMART and download a new copy or request an ARX to do this for you.
  198. Notification of a change of address by an amateur radio operator must be made to the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment within: 1 Month
  199. 
  200. 9
  201. You must notify the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment of changes to your mailing address: by using your logon and password to access SMART and update your client records. To obtain a logon and password email info@rsm.govt.nz or phone 0508 RSM INFO for more help.
  202. An amateur radio licence is normally issued for: life
  203. A licence that provides for a given class of radio transmitter to be used without requiring a
  204. licence in the owner’s own name is known as: a general user radio licence
  205. A licensee of an amateur radio station may permit anyone to: pass brief messages of a
  206. personal nature provided no fees or other consideration are requested or accepted
  207. International communications on behalf of third parties may be transmitted by an amateur station only if: such communications have been authorised by the countries concerned
  208. The term "amateur third party communications" refers to: messages to or on behalf of non- licensed people or Organisations
  209. The Morse code signal SOS is sent by a station: in grave and imminent danger and requiring immediate assistance
  210. If you hear distress traffic and are unable to render assistance, you should: maintain watch until you are certain that assistance is forthcoming
  211. The transmission of messages in a secret code by the operator of an amateur station is:
  212. not permitted except for control signals by the licensees of remote beacon or repeater stations
  213. Messages from an amateur station in one of the following are expressly forbidden: secret cipher
  214. The term "harmful interference" means: interference which obstructs or repeatedly interrupts radiocommunication services
  215. When interference to the reception of radiocommunications is caused by the operation of an amateur station, the station operator: must immediately comply with any action required by the MBIE to prevent the interference
  216. An amateur radio operator may knowingly interfere with another radio communication or signal: never
  217. After qualifying and gaining an amateur radio licence you are permitted to: first operate for three months on amateur radio bands below 5 MHz and bands above 25 MHz to log fifty or more contacts
  218. 
  219. 10
  220. Morse code is permitted for use by: any amateur radio operator
  221. As a New Zealand amateur radio operator you may communicate with: other amateur
  222. stations world-wide
  223. As a New Zealand amateur radio operator you: may train for and support disaster relief activities
  224. Your amateur radio licence permits you to: establish and operate an earth station in the amateur satellite service
  225. You hear a station using the callsign “VK3XYZ stroke ZL” on your local VHF repeater. This is: the station of an overseas visitor
  226. The abbreviation “HF” refers to the radio spectrum between: 3 MHz and 30 MHz
  227. Bandplans showing the transmission modes for New Zealand amateur radio bands are developed and published for the mutual respect and advantage of all operators: to ensure that your operations do not impose problems on other operators and that their operations do not impact on you
  228. The abbreviation “VHF” refers to the radio spectrum between: 30 MHz and 300 MHz
  229. An amateur radio operator must be able to: verify that transmissions are within an
  230. authorised frequency band
  231. An amateur station may be closed down at any time by: a demand from an authorised official of the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment
  232. An amateur radio licence: does not confer on its holder a monopoly on the use of any frequency or band
  233. A person in distress: may use any means available to attract attention
  234. _________________________________________
  235. (August 2005)
  236. 
  237. 11
  238. Pursuant to section 111 of the Radiocommunications Act 1989 and Regulation 9 of the Radiocommunications Regulations 2001, and acting under delegated authority from the chief
  239. executive, I give the following notice.
  240. Notice
  241. 1. Short title and commencement
  242. 1. This notice is the Radiocommunications Regulations (General User Radio Licence for Amateur Radio Operators) Notice 2012.
  243. 2. This notice comes into force on 20 December 2012.
  244. 2. General user radio licence
  245. A general user radio licence is granted for the transmission of radio waves by amateur radio operators in New Zealand, for the purpose of communications in the amateur radio service in accordance with the terms, conditions and restrictions of this notice.
  246. 3. Terms, conditions and restrictions applying to New Zealand amateur operators
  247. 1. Persons who hold a General Amateur Operator’s Certificate of Competency and a callsign issued pursuant to the Regulations may operate an amateur radio station in New Zealand.
  248. 2. The callsign prefix of “ZL” may be substituted with the prefix “ZM” by the callsign holder for the period of, and participation in, a recognised contest, or as the control station for special event communications.
  249. 3. Operation on amateur bands between 5 MHz and 25 MHz is not permitted unless a person has held a General Amateur Operators Certificate of Competency for three months and logged 50 contacts during this period. The person must keep the logbook record for at least one year and, during this period, produce it at the request of the chief executive.
  250. 4. Terms, conditions and restrictions applying to visiting amateur operators
  251. 1. Persons visiting New Zealand who hold a current amateur certificate of competency, authorisation or licence issued by another administration, may operate an amateur station in New Zealand for a period not exceeding 90 days, provided the certificate, authorisation or licence meets the requirements of Recommendation ITU-R M.1544 or CEPT T/R 61-01 CEPT T/R 61-02 and is produced at the request of the chief executive.
  252. 
  253. 12
  254. 2. The visiting overseas operator must use the national callsign allocated by the other administration to the operator, in conjunction with the prefix or suffix “ZL” which is to be separated from the national callsign by the character “/” (telegraphy), or the word “stroke” (telephony).
  255. 5. Terms, conditions and restrictions applying to all amateur operators
  256. 1. The use of callsigns, including temporary and club callsigns, must be in accordance with publication PIB 46 “Radio Operator Certificate and Callsign Rules” published at www.rsm.govt.nz
  257. 2. Callsigns must be transmitted at least once every 15 minutes during communications.
  258. 3. National and international communication is permitted only between amateur stations, and is
  259. limited to matters of a personal nature, or for the purpose of self-training, intercommunication and radio technology investigation, solely with a personal aim and without pecuniary interest. The passing of brief messages of a personal nature on behalf of other persons is also permitted, provided no fees or other consideration is requested or accepted.
  260. 4. Communications must not be encoded for the purpose of obscuring their meaning, except for control signals by the operators of remotely controlled amateur stations.
  261. 5. Except as provided to the contrary in this notice, transmitter power output must not exceed 1000 watts peak envelope power (pX), as defined in ITU Radio Regulation 1.157.
  262. 6. Amateur stations must, as far as is compatible with practical considerations, comply with the latest ITU-R recommendations to the extent applicable to the amateur service.
  263. 7. In accordance with Article 25 of the International Radio Regulations, amateur operators are encouraged to prepare for, and meet, communication needs in support of disaster relief.
  264. 8. Amateur beacons, repeaters and fixed links may not be established pursuant to this licence.
  265. 9. Unwanted emissions outside the frequency bands specified in this Schedule must comply with the requirements of technical standard ETSI ETS 300 684 published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI).
  266. 10. This general user radio licence applies only to transmissions within the frequency ranges set out in the Schedule to this licence. All such transmissions must be made in accordance with the notes for the frequency range in which that transmission take place and in accordance with the other conditions set out in this licence.
  267. 6. Consequential revocation of licences
  268. The Radiocommunication Regulations (General User Radio Licence for Amateur Radio Operators) Notice 2011, dated the 9th day of November 2011 and published in the New Zealand Gazette, 17 November 2011, No. 176, page 5040, is revoked.
  269. Schedule
  270. 13
  271. Frequency Range
  272. 130 to 190 kHz 472 to 479 kHz 505 to 515 kHz 1.80 to 1.95 MHz 3.50 to 3.90 MHz 7.00 to 7.10 MHz 7.10 to 7.20 MHz 7.20 to 7.30 MHz 10.10 to 10.15 MHz 14.00 to 14.35 MHz 18.068 to 18.168 MHz 21.00 to 21.45 MHz 24.89 to 24.99 MHz 26.95 to 27.30 MHz 28.00 to 29.70 MHz 51.00 to 53.00 MHz 144.00 to 146.00 MHz 146.00 to 148.00 MHz 430.00 to 440.00 MHz 921.00 to 928.00 MHz 1.24 to 1.30 GHz 2.396 to 2.45 GHz 3.30 to 3.41 GHz
  273. 5.65 to 5.85 GHz 10.00 to 10.50 GHz 24.00 to 24.05 GHz 24.05 to 24.25 GHZ 47.00 to 47.20 GHz 75.50 to 76.00 GHz 76.00 to 81.00 GHz 122.25 to 123.00 GHz 134.00 to 136.00 GHz 136.00 to 141.00 GHz 241.00 to 248.00 GHz 248.00 to 250.00 GHz 275.00 to 1000 GHz
  274. Notes
  275. 2, 4, 6 2, 7 2,4,7,8,9 2
  276. 2
  277. 1
  278. 2
  279. 2
  280. 1
  281. 1
  282. 1
  283. 1
  284. 2, 3, 5, 6 1
  285. 2
  286. 1
  287. 2
  288. 1, 2, 3 3,7 1,2 1,3 1,2 1,3 1,2 1,3
  289. 3
  290. 1 1,2 1,2 2,3 1 1,2 1, 2, 3 1
  291. 2, 4
  292. 
  293. Notes to Schedule
  294. 14
  295. 1. The following ranges of frequencies may also be used for amateur satellite communications:
  296. 7.00 to 7.10 MHz
  297. 3.40 to 3.41 GHz
  298. 14.00 to 14.25 MHz
  299. 5.65 to 5.67 GHz (a)
  300. 18.068 to 18.168 MHz
  301. 5.83 to 5.85 GHz (b)
  302. 21.00 to 21.45 MHz
  303. 10.45 to 10.50 GHz
  304. 24.89 to 24.99 MHz
  305. 24.00 to 24.05 GHz
  306. 28.00 to 29.70 MHz
  307. 47.00 to 47.20 GHz
  308. 144.00 to 146.00 MHz
  309. 75.50 to 81.00 GHz
  310. 435.00 to 438.00 MHz
  311. 134.00 to 141.00 GHz
  312. 1.26 to 1.27 GHz (a)
  313. 241.00 to 250.00 GHz
  314. 2.40 to 2.45 GHz
  315. a. Limited to the earth-to-space direction.
  316. b. Limited to the space-to-earth direction.
  317. 2. These frequencies are, or may be, allocated for use by other services. Amateur operators
  318. must accept interference from, and must not cause interference to, such other services.
  319. 3. The frequencies:
  320. 27.12 MHz
  321. (26.957 - 27.283 MHz),
  322. 433.92 MHz
  323. (433.05 - 434.79 MHz),
  324. 921.5 MHz
  325. (915 - 928 MHz),
  326. 2.45 GHz
  327. (2.4 - 2.5 GHz),
  328. 5.8 GHz
  329. (5.725 - 5.875 GHz),
  330. 24.125 GHz
  331. (24.00 - 24.25 GHz),
  332. 122.5 GHz
  333. (122 - 123 GHz), and
  334. 245 GHz
  335. (244 - 246 GHz)
  336. 4. are designated for industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) purposes. These frequencies may also be allocated to Short Range Device (SRD) services. Amateur operators must accept interference from ISM and SRD services within these frequency ranges.
  337. 5. Allocated to the amateur service on a temporary basis until further notice.
  338. 6. Telecommand and telemetry operation only.
  339. 7. Radiated power must not exceed 5 watts e.i.r.p.
  340. 8. Radiated power must not exceed 25 watts e.i.r.p.
  341. 9. The bandwidth of emissions must not exceed 200 Hz
  342. 10. Use of this band is not permitted after 31 December 2013.
  343. Dated at Wellington this 29th day of November 2012.
  344. SANJAI RAJ, Acting General Manager, Product Safety and Regulatory Management, Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment.
  345. Explanatory Note
  346. This note is not part of the notice, but is intended to indicate its general effect.
  347. This notice prescribes that, pursuant to Regulations made under the Radiocommunications Act 1989, a general user radio licence is granted for the transmission of radio waves by amateur radio operators in New Zealand, for the purpose of communications in the amateur radio service, in accordance with the terms, conditions, and restrictions of this notice. This notice comes into force on 20 December 2012.
  348. This notice replaces the Radiocommunications Regulations (General User Radio Licence for Amateur Radio Operators) Notice 2011. The principal change from that notice is the addition of a new band (472 to 479 kHz).
  349. 15
  350. 16
  351. 
  352. 17
  353. Question File: 1. Regulations: (7 questions)
  354. 1. The Amateur Service may be briefly defined as:
  355. a. a private radio service for personal gain and public benefit
  356. b. a public radio service used for public service communications
  357. c. a radiocommunication service for the purpose of self-training, intercommunication
  358. and technical investigation
  359. d. a private radio service intended only for emergency communications
  360. ==================
  361. 2. The organisation responsible for the International Radio Regulations is the:
  362. a. European Radiocommunications Office
  363. b. United Nations
  364. c. International T elecommunication Union
  365. d. European T elecommunication Standards Institute
  366. ==================
  367. 3. New Zealand's views on international radio regulatory matters are coordinated by
  368. the:
  369. a. New Zealand Association of Radio Transmitters (NZART)
  370. b. Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment (MBIE)
  371. c. International Amateur Radio Union (IARU)
  372. d. Prime Minister's Office
  373. ==================
  374. 4. For regulatory purposes the world is divided into regions each with different radio
  375. spectrum allocations. New Zealand is in:
  376. a. Region 1
  377. b. Region 2
  378. c. Region 3
  379. d. Region 4
  380. ==================
  381. 5. The prime document for the administration of the Amateur Service in New Zealand
  382. is the:
  383. a. New Zealand Radiocommunications Regulations
  384. b. Broadcasting Act
  385. c. Radio Amateur's Handbook
  386. d. minutes of the International Telecommunication Union meetings
  387. ==================
  388. 6. The administration of the Amateur Service in New Zealand is by:
  389. a. the Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment Radio Spectrum
  390. Management Group
  391. b. the Area Code administrators of New Zealand Post
  392. c. the Radio Communications Division of the Ministry of Police
  393. d. your local council public relations section
  394. ==================
  395. 7. An Amateur Station is a station:
  396. a. in the public radio service
  397. b. using radiocommunications for a commercial purpose
  398. c. using equipment for training new radiocommunications operators
  399. d. in the Amateur Service
  400. 18
  401. ==================
  402. 8. A General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency can be inspected by an
  403. authorised officer from the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment:
  404. a. at any time
  405. b. on any business day
  406. c. before 9 p.m.
  407. d. only on public holidays
  408. ==================
  409. 9. The fundamental regulations controlling the Amateur Service are to be found in:
  410. a. the International Radio Regulations from the ITU
  411. b. the Radio Amateur's Handbook
  412. c. the NZART Callbook
  413. d. on the packet radio bulletin-board
  414. ==================
  415. 10. You must have a General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency to:
  416. a. transmit on public-service frequencies
  417. b. retransmit shortwave broadcasts
  418. c. repair radio equipment
  419. d. transmit in bands allocated to the Amateur Service
  420. ==================
  421. 11. A New Zealand General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency allows you
  422. to operate:
  423. a. anywhere in the world
  424. b. anywhere in New Zealand and in any other country that recognises the Certificate
  425. c. within 50 km of your home station location
  426. d. only at your home address
  427. ==================
  428. 12. With a General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency you may operate transmitters in your station:
  429. a. one at a time
  430. b. one at a time, except for emergency communications
  431. c. any number at one time
  432. d. any number, so long as they are transmitting on different bands
  433. ==================
  434. 13. You must keep the following document at your amateur station:
  435. a. your General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency
  436. b. a copy of the Rules and Regulations for the Amateur Service
  437. c. a copy of the Radio Amateur's Handbook for instant reference
  438. d. a chart showing the amateur radio bands
  439. ==================
  440. 19
  441. 14. An Amateur Station is one which is:
  442. a. operated by the holder of a General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency
  443. on the amateur radio bands
  444. b. owned and operated by a person who is not engaged professionally in radio
  445. communications
  446. c. used exclusively to provide two-way communication in connection with activities of
  447. amateur sporting organisations
  448. d. used primarily for emergency communications during floods, earthquakes and
  449. similar disasters.
  450. ==================
  451. 15. If the qualified operator of an amateur radio station is absent overseas, the home station may be used by:
  452. a. any member of the immediate family to maintain contact with only the qualified operator
  453. b. any person with an appropriate General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency
  454. c. the immediate family to communicate with any amateur radio operator
  455. d. the immediate family if a separate callsign for mobile use has been obtained by
  456. the absent operator
  457. ==================
  458. 16. All amateur stations, regardless of the mode of transmission used, must be equipped with:
  459. a. a reliable means for determining the operating radio frequency
  460. b. a dummy antenna
  461. c. an overmodulation indicating device
  462. d. a dc power meter
  463. ==================
  464. 17. An amateur station may transmit unidentified signals:
  465. a. when making a brief test not intended for reception by anyone else
  466. b. when conducted on a clear frequency when no interference will be caused
  467. c. when the meaning of transmitted information must be obscured to preserve
  468. secrecy
  469. d. never, such transmissions are not permitted
  470. ==================
  471. 18. You may operate your amateur radio station somewhere in New Zealand for short
  472. periods away from the location entered in the administration's database:
  473. a. only during times of emergency
  474. b. only after giving proper notice to the Ministry of Business Innovation and
  475. Employment
  476. c. during an approved emergency practice
  477. d. whenever you want to
  478. ==================
  479. 20
  480. 19. Before operating an amateur station in a motor vehicle, you must:
  481. a. give the Land Transport Authority the vehicle's licence plate number
  482. b. inform the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment
  483. c. hold a current General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency
  484. d. obtain an additional callsign
  485. ==================
  486. 20. An applicant for a New Zealand General Amateur Operator Certificate of
  487. Competency must first qualify by meeting the appropriate examination
  488. requirements. Application may then be made by:
  489. a. anyone except a representative of a foreign government
  490. b. only a citizen of New Zealand
  491. c. anyone except an employee of the Ministry of Business Innovation and
  492. Employment
  493. d. anyone
  494. ==================
  495. 21. An amateur radio operator must have current New Zealand postal and email
  496. addresses so the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment:
  497. a. has a record of the location of each amateur station
  498. b. can refund overpaid fees
  499. c. can publish a callsign directory
  500. d. can send mail to the operator
  501. ==================
  502. 22. If you transmit from another amateur's station, the person responsible for its
  503. proper operation is:
  504. a. both of you
  505. b. the other amateur (the station’s owner)
  506. c. you, the operator
  507. d. the station owner, unless the station records show that you were the operator at
  508. the time
  509. ==================
  510. 23. Your responsibility as a station operator is that you must:
  511. a. allow another amateur to operate your station upon request
  512. b. be present whenever the station is operated
  513. c. be responsible for the proper operation of the station in accordance with the
  514. Radiocommunications Regulations
  515. d. notify the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment if another amateur acts
  516. as the operator
  517. ==================
  518. 24. An amateur station must have a qualified operator:
  519. a. only when training another amateur
  520. b. whenever the station receiver is operated
  521. c. whenever the station is used for transmitting
  522. d. when transmitting and receiving
  523. ==================
  524. 21
  525. 25. A log-book for recording stations worked:
  526. a. is compulsory for every amateur radio operator
  527. b. is recommended for all amateur radio operators
  528. c. must list all messages sent
  529. d. must record time in UTC
  530. ==================
  531. 26. Unqualified persons in your family cannot transmit using your amateur station if
  532. they are alone with your equipment because they must:
  533. a. not use your equipment without your permission
  534. b. hold a General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency before they are
  535. allowed to be operators
  536. c. first know how to use the right abbreviations and Q signals
  537. d. first know the right frequencies and emissions for transmitting
  538. ==================
  539. 27. Amateur radio repeater equipment and frequencies in New Zealand are co-
  540. ordinated by:
  541. a. the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment
  542. b. NZART branches in the main cities
  543. c. repeater trustees
  544. d. the NZART Frequency Management and Technical Advisory Group.
  545. ==================
  546. 28. A qualified operator of an amateur radio station may permit anyone to:
  547. a. operate the station under direct supervision
  548. b. send business traffic to any other station.
  549. c. pass brief comments of a personal nature provided no fees or other considerations
  550. are requested or accepted
  551. d. use the station for Morse sending practice
  552. ==================
  553. 29. The minimum age for a person to hold a General Amateur Operator Certificate of
  554. Competency is:
  555. a. 12 years
  556. b. 16 years
  557. c. 21 years
  558. d. there is no age limit
  559. ==================
  560. 30. If you contact another station and your signal is strong and perfectly readable, you
  561. should:
  562. a. turn on your speech processor
  563. b. reduce your SWR
  564. c. not make any changes, otherwise you may lose contact
  565. d. reduce your transmitter power output to the minimum needed to maintain contact
  566. ==================
  567. 31. The age when an amateur radio operator is required to surrender the General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency is:
  568. a. 65 years
  569. b. 70 years
  570. c. 75 years
  571. d. there is no age limit
  572. ==================
  573. 32. Peak envelope power (PEP) output is the:
  574. a. average power output at the crest of the modulating cycle
  575. b. total power contained in each sideband
  576. c. carrier power output
  577. d. transmitter power output on key-up condition
  578. ==================
  579. 33. The maximum power output permitted from an amateur station is:
  580. a. that needed to overcome interference from other stations
  581. b. 30 watt PEP
  582. c. specified in the amateur radio General User Radio Licence
  583. d. 1000 watt mean power or 2000 watt PEP
  584. ==================
  585. 34. The transmitter power output for amateur stations at all times is:
  586. a. 25 watt PEP minimum output
  587. b. that needed to overcome interference from other stations
  588. c. 1000 watt PEP maximum
  589. d. the minimum power necessary to communicate and within the terms of the
  590. amateur radio GURL
  591. ==================
  592. 35. You identify your amateur station by transmitting your:
  593. a. "handle"
  594. b. callsign
  595. c. first name and your location
  596. d. full name
  597. ==================
  598. 36. This callsign could be allocated to an amateur radio operator in New Zealand:
  599. a. ZK-CKF
  600. b. ZLC5
  601. c. ZL2HF
  602. d. ZMX4432
  603. ==================
  604. 37. The callsign of a New Zealand amateur radio station:
  605. a. is listed in the administration's database
  606. b. can be any sequence of characters made-up by the operator
  607. c. can never be changed
  608. d. is changed annually
  609. ==================
  610. 22
  611. 23
  612. 38. These letters are generally used for the first letters in New Zealand amateur radio callsigns:
  613. a. ZS
  614. b. ZL
  615. c. VK
  616. d. LZ
  617. ==================
  618. 39. The figures normally used in New Zealand amateur radio callsigns are:
  619. a. any two-digit number, 45 through 99
  620. b. any two-digit number, 22 through 44
  621. c. a single digit, 5 through 9
  622. d. a single digit, 1 through 4
  623. ==================
  624. 40. Before re-issuing, a relinquished callsign is normally kept for:
  625. a. 1 year
  626. b. 2 years
  627. c. 0 years
  628. d. 5 years
  629. ==================
  630. 41. A General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency authorises the use of:
  631. a. all amateur radio transmitting and receiving apparatus
  632. b. a TV receiver
  633. c. amateur radio transmitting apparatus only
  634. d. marine mobile equipment
  635. ==================
  636. 42. General Amateur Operator Certificates of Competency and callsigns are issued
  637. pursuant to the Regulations by the:
  638. a. New Zealand Association of Radio Transmitters (NZART)
  639. b. Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment Approved Radio Examiners
  640. c. Department of Internal Affairs
  641. d. Prime Minister's Office
  642. ==================
  643. 43. To replace a written copy of your General Amateur Operator Certificate of
  644. Competency you should:
  645. a. Apply to an Approved Radio Examiner to re-sit the examination
  646. b. Download an application form from the Department of Internal Affairs website
  647. c. Download an application form from the Ministry’s website (or have an Approved
  648. Radio Examiner do this for you)
  649. d. Download and print one from the official database (or have an Approved Radio
  650. Examiner do this for you)
  651. ==================
  652. 24
  653. 44. A General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency holder must advise permanent changes to postal and email addresses and update the official database records within:
  654. a. 7 days
  655. b. one calendar month
  656. c. 10 days
  657. d. one year
  658. ==================
  659. 45. A General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency:
  660. a. expires after 6 months
  661. b. contains the unique callsign(s) to be used by that operator
  662. c. is transferable
  663. d. permits the transmission of radio waves
  664. ==================
  665. 46. A General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency is normally issued for:
  666. a. 1 year
  667. b. 5 years
  668. c. 10 years
  669. d. life
  670. ==================
  671. 47. A licence that provides for a given class of radio transmitter to be used without
  672. requiring a licence in the owner’s own name is known as:
  673. a. a repeater licence
  674. b. a general user radio licence
  675. c. a beacon licence
  676. d. a reciprocal licence
  677. ==================
  678. 48. The holder of a General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency may permit anyone to:
  679. a. use an amateur radio station to communicate with other radio amateurs
  680. b. pass brief messages of a personal nature provided no fees or other consideration
  681. are requested or accepted
  682. c. operate the amateur station under the supervision and in the presence of a
  683. qualified operator
  684. d. take part in communications only if prior written permission is received from the
  685. Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment
  686. ==================
  687. 49. International communications on behalf of third parties may be transmitted by an amateur station only if:
  688. a. prior remuneration has been received
  689. b. such communications have been authorised by the countries concerned
  690. c. the communication is transmitted in secret code
  691. d. English is used to identify the station at the end of each transmission
  692. ==================
  693. 25
  694. 50. The term "amateur third party communications" refers to:
  695. a. a simultaneous communication between three operators
  696. b. the transmission of commercial or secret messages
  697. c. messages to or on behalf of non-licensed people or organisations
  698. d. none of the above
  699. ==================
  700. 51. The Morse code signal SOS is sent by a station:
  701. a. with an urgent message
  702. b. in grave and imminent danger and requiring immediate assistance
  703. c. making a report about a shipping hazard
  704. d. sending important weather information
  705. ==================
  706. 52. If you hear distress traffic and are unable to render assistance, you should:
  707. a. maintain watch until you are certain that assistance is forthcoming
  708. b. enter the details in the log book and take no further action
  709. c. take no action
  710. d. tell all other stations to cease transmitting
  711. ==================
  712. 53. The transmission of messages in a secret code by the operator of an amateur
  713. station is:
  714. a. permitted when communications are transmitted on behalf of a government
  715. agency
  716. b. permitted when communications are transmitted on behalf of third parties
  717. c. permitted during amateur radio contests
  718. d. not permitted except for control signals by the licensees of remote beacon or
  719. repeater stations
  720. ==================
  721. 54. Messages from an amateur station in one of the following are expressly forbidden:
  722. a. ASCII
  723. b. International No. 2 code
  724. c. Baudot code
  725. d. secret cipher
  726. ==================
  727. 55. The term "harmful interference" means:
  728. a. interference which obstructs or repeatedly interrupts radiocommunication services
  729. b. an antenna system which accidentally falls on to a neighbour's property
  730. c. a receiver with the audio volume unacceptably loud
  731. d. interference caused by a station of a secondary service
  732. ==================
  733. 56. When interference to the reception of radiocommunications is caused by the operation of an amateur station, the station operator:
  734. a. must immediately comply with any action required by the MBIE to prevent the interference
  735. b. may continue to operate with steps taken to reduce the interference when the station operator can afford it
  736. c. may continue to operate without restrictions
  737. d. is not obligated to take any action
  738. ==================
  739. 57. An amateur radio operator may knowingly interfere with another radio
  740. communication or signal:
  741. a. when the operator of another station is acting in an illegal manner
  742. b. when another station begins transmitting on a frequency you already occupy
  743. c. never
  744. d. when the interference is unavoidable because of crowded band conditions
  745. ==================
  746. 58. After qualifying and gaining a General Amateur Operator Certificate of
  747. Competency you are permitted to:
  748. a. operate on any frequency in the entire radio spectrum
  749. b. first operate for three months on amateur radio bands below 5 MHz and bands
  750. above 25 MHz to log fifty or more contacts
  751. c. ignore published bandplans
  752. d. make frequent tune-up transmissions at 10 MHz
  753. ==================
  754. 59. Morse code is permitted for use by:
  755. a. only operators who have passed a Morse code test
  756. b. those stations with computers to decode it
  757. c. any amateur radio operator
  758. d. only those stations equipped for headphone reception
  759. ==================
  760. 60. As a New Zealand amateur radio operator you may communicate with:
  761. a. only amateur stations within New Zealand
  762. b. only stations running more than 500w PEP output
  763. c. only stations using the same transmission mode
  764. d. other amateur stations world-wide
  765. ==================
  766. 61. As a New Zealand amateur radio operator you:
  767. a. must regularly operate using dry batteries
  768. b. should use shortened antennas
  769. c. may train for and support disaster relief activities
  770. d. must always have solar-powered equipment in reserve
  771. ==================
  772. 26
  773. 27
  774. 62. Your General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency permits you to:
  775. a. work citizen band stations
  776. b. establish and operate an earth station in the amateur satellite service
  777. c. service commercial radio equipment over 1 kW output
  778. d. re-wire fixed household electrical supply mains
  779. ==================
  780. 63. You hear a station using the callsign “VK3XYZ stroke ZL” on your local VHF
  781. repeater. This is:
  782. a. a callsign not authorised for use in New Zealand
  783. b. a confused illegal operator
  784. c. the station of an overseas visitor
  785. d. probably an unlicensed person using stolen equipment
  786. ==================
  787. 64. The abbreviation “HF” refers to the radio spectrum between:
  788. a. 2MHzand10MHz
  789. b. 3MHzand30MHz
  790. c. 20 MHz and 200 MHz
  791. d. 30 MHz and 300 MHz
  792. ==================
  793. 65. Bandplans showing the transmission modes for New Zealand amateur radio bands
  794. are developed and published for the mutual respect and advantage of all
  795. operators:
  796. a. to ensure that your operations do not impose problems on other operators and that
  797. their operations do not impact on you
  798. b. to keep experimental developments contained
  799. c. to reduce the number of modes in any one band
  800. d. to keep overseas stations separate from local stations
  801. ==================
  802. 66. The abbreviation “VHF” refers to the radio spectrum between:
  803. a. 2MHzand10MHz
  804. b. 3MHzand30MHz
  805. c. 30 MHz and 300 MHz
  806. d. 200 MHz and 2000 MHz
  807. ==================
  808. 67. An amateur radio operator must be able to:
  809. a. converse in the languages shown on the Certificate of Competency
  810. b. read Morse code at 12 words-per-minute
  811. c. monitor standard frequency transmissions
  812. d. verify that transmissions are within an authorised frequency band
  813. ==================
  814. 68. An amateur station may be closed down at any time by:
  815. a. a demand from an irate neighbour experiencing television interference
  816. b. a demand from an authorised official of the Ministry of Business Innovation and
  817. Employment
  818. c. an official from your local council
  819. d. anyone until your aerials are made less unsightly
  820. ==================
  821. 69. A General Amateur Operator Certificate of Competency:
  822. a. can never be revoked
  823. b. gives a waiver over copyright
  824. c. does not confer on its holder a monopoly on the use of any frequency or band
  825. d. can be readily transferred
  826. ==================
  827. 70. A person in distress:
  828. a. must use correct communication procedures
  829. b. may use any means available to attract attention
  830. c. must give position with a grid reference
  831. d. must use allocated safety frequencies
  832. ==================
  833. 28
  834. Section 2 – Frequencies
  835. The Ham band plan is listed below. Learn the Red ones.
  836. 29
  837. Wavelength
  838. Lower Limit
  839. Upper Limit
  840. Restrictions
  841. 1800m
  842. 0.13MHz
  843. 0.19MHz
  844. Power less than 5W
  845. 160m
  846. 1.8MHz
  847. 1.95MHz
  848. 80m
  849. 3.5MHz
  850. 3.9MHz
  851. 40m
  852. 7MHz
  853. 7.3MHz
  854. 7.1-7.3MHz is on secondary shared usage
  855. 30m
  856. 10.1MHz
  857. 10.15MHz
  858. Morse, Digital modes only
  859. 20m
  860. 14MHz
  861. 14.35MHz
  862. 17m
  863. 18.068MHz
  864. 18.168MHz
  865. 15m
  866. 21MHz
  867. 21.45MHz
  868. 12m
  869. 24.89MHz
  870. 24.99MHz
  871. 11m
  872. 26.95MHz
  873. 27.3MHz
  874. Telemetry or Telecontrol only - 5W Max
  875. 10m
  876. 28MHz
  877. 29.7MHz
  878. 6m
  879. 50MHz
  880. 53MHz
  881. MBIE Approval required for 50-51MHz operation
  882. 2m
  883. 144MHz
  884. 148MHz
  885. 70cm
  886. 430MHz
  887. 440MHz
  888. 32cm
  889. 921MHz
  890. 929MHz
  891. 25W max
  892. 23cm
  893. 1240MHz
  894. 1300MHz
  895. 12cm
  896. 2396MHz
  897. 2450MHz
  898. 9cm
  899. 3300MHz
  900. 3410MHz
  901. 5cm
  902. 5650MHz
  903. 5850MHz
  904. 3cm
  905. 10GHz
  906. 10.5GHz
  907. 1.2cm
  908. 24GHz
  909. 24.25GHz
  910. 6mm
  911. 47GHz
  912. 47.2GHz
  913. 4mm
  914. 75.5GHz
  915. 81GHz
  916. A new ham can transmit on any band below 5MHz or above 25MHz, for the first 3 months. Access is granted to the 5-25MHz portion on presentation of a log book containing 50 contacts for inspection, after 3 months.
  917. All amateurs have equal rights to the bands
  918. Some bands are shared with other services. Hams may operate within these shared bands, provided they do not cause harmful interference to the other primary user. Shared bands include
  919. 7.1-7.3MHz in the 40m band
  920. 51-53MHz in the 6m band 146-148MHz in the 2m band
  921. NZ operators have the following band on a primary basis 21-21.45MHz the 15m band
  922. 30
  923. The 50-51MHz portion of 6m requires written approval from the MBIE, and the operator may be subject to special conditions imposed by the MBIE.
  924. The band plans include portions for narrow bandwidths of transmission eg Morse code. This is to alleviate interference issues between users of different modes. The band plans were developed by NZART in the interest of all hams in NZ. These band plans are recommended, and all amateurs should follow them.
  925. Question File: 2. Frequencies: (2 questions)
  926. 1. Amateur stations are often regarded as "frequency agile". This means:
  927. a. operation is limited to frequency modulation
  928. b. operators can choose to operate anywhere on a shared band
  929. c. a bandswitch is required on all transceivers
  930. d. on a shared band operators can change frequency to avoid interfering
  931. ==================
  932. 2. A new amateur radio operator is permitted to:
  933. a. operate on all amateur bands other than VHF at least weekly using a computer for
  934. log-keeping
  935. b. operate only on specified amateur bands for 3 months logging at least 50 contacts
  936. and retaining the log book for at least one year for possible official inspection
  937. c. operate only on one fixed frequency in the amateur bands between 5 and 25 MHz
  938. for 6 months and then present the log book for official inspection
  939. d. operate on amateur bands between 5 and 25 MHz as and when the operator
  940. chooses
  941. ==================
  942. 3. The frequency limits of the “80 metre band” are:
  943. a. 3.50 to 4.0 MHz
  944. b. 3.50 to 3.90 MHz
  945. c. 3.50 to 3.85 MHz
  946. d. 3.6 to 3.9 MHz
  947. ==================
  948. 4. In New Zealand the frequency limits of the “40 metre band” are:
  949. a. 7.00 to 7.10 MHz
  950. b. 7.00 to 7.15 MHz
  951. c. 7.00 to 7.30 MHz
  952. d. 7.10 to 7.40 MHz
  953. ==================
  954. 5. The frequency limits of the “20 metre band” are:
  955. a. 14.00 to 14.10 MHz
  956. b. 14.00 to 14.45 MHz
  957. c. 14.00 to 14.50 MHz
  958. d. 14.00 to 14.35 MHz
  959. ==================
  960. 6. The frequency limits of the “15 metre band” are:
  961. a. 21.00 to 21.35 MHz
  962. b. 21.00 to 21.40 MHz
  963. c. 21.00 to 21.45 MHz
  964. d. 21.00 to 21.50 MHz
  965. ==================
  966. 7. The frequency limits of the “10 metre band” are:
  967. a. 28.00 to 28.35 MHz
  968. b. 28.00 to 28.40 MHz
  969. c. 28.00 to 29.00 MHz
  970. d. 28.00 to 29.70 MHz
  971. ==================
  972. 8. The frequency limits of the “2 metre band” are:
  973. a. 144 to 149 MHz
  974. b. 144 to 148 MHz
  975. c. 146 to 148 MHz
  976. d. 144 to 150 MHz
  977. ==================
  978. 9. The frequency limits of the “70 centimetre band” are:
  979. a. 430 to 440 MHz
  980. b. 430 to 450 MHz
  981. c. 435 to 438 MHz
  982. d. 430 to 460 MHz
  983. ==================
  984. 10. The published bandplans for the New Zealand amateur bands:
  985. a. are determined by the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment
  986. b. change at each equinox
  987. c. limit the operating frequencies of high-power stations
  988. d. were developed by NZART in the interests of all radio amateurs
  989. ==================
  990. 11. Operation on the 130 to 190 kHz band requires:
  991. a. a vertical half-wave antenna
  992. b. special permission to operate in daylight hours
  993. c. power output limited to 5 watt e.i.r.p. maximum
  994. d. receivers with computers with sound cards
  995. ==================
  996. 12. Two bands where amateur satellites may operate are
  997. a. 28.0 to 29.7 MHz and 144.0 to 146.0 MHz
  998. b. 21.0 to 21.1 MHz and 146.0 to 148.0 MHz
  999. c. 3.5 to 3.8 MHz and 7.0 to 7.1 MHz
  1000. d. 7.1 to 7.3 MHz and 10.1 to 10.15 MHz
  1001. ==================
  1002. 31
  1003. 32
  1004. 13. The band 50 to 51 MHz is available to:
  1005. a. amateur radio operators subject to special conditions
  1006. b. all amateur radio operators as part of the 6 metre band
  1007. c. television broadcasting only
  1008. d. radio broadcasting stations only
  1009. ==================
  1010. 14. The following amateur radio band is shared with other services:
  1011. a. 14.0 to 14.35 MHz
  1012. b. 7.2 to 7.3 MHz
  1013. c. 18.068 to 18.168 MHz
  1014. d. 144.0 to 146.0 MHz
  1015. ==================
  1016. 15. The frequency band 146 to 148 MHz is:
  1017. a. shared with other communication services
  1018. b. allocated exclusively for police communications
  1019. c. exclusive to repeater operation
  1020. d. reserved for emergency communications
  1021. ==================
  1022. 16. The following amateur radio band is shared with another service in New Zealand:
  1023. a. 51to53MHz
  1024. b. 144 to 146 MHz
  1025. c. 7.0 to 7.1 MHz
  1026. d. 24.89 to 24.99 MHz
  1027. ==================
  1028. 17. The published New Zealand amateur radio bandplans are:
  1029. a. obligatory for all amateur radio operators to observe
  1030. b. recommended, and all amateur radio operators should follow them
  1031. c. to show where distant stations can be worked
  1032. d. for tests and experimental purposes only
  1033. ==================
  1034. 18. The following band is allocated to New Zealand amateur radio operators on a
  1035. primary basis:
  1036. a. 3.5 to 3.9 MHz
  1037. b. 10.1 to 10.15 MHz
  1038. c. 146 to 148 MHz
  1039. d. 21 to 21.45 MHz
  1040. ==================
  1041. 19. When the Amateur Service is a secondary user of a band and another service is the primary user, this means:
  1042. a. nothing at all, all users have equal rights to operate
  1043. b. amateurs may only use the band during emergencies
  1044. c. the band may be used by amateurs provided they do not cause harmful
  1045. interference to primary users
  1046. d. you may increase transmitter power to overcome any interference caused by
  1047. primary users
  1048. ==================
  1049. 33
  1050. 20. This rule applies if two amateur radio stations want to use the same frequency:
  1051. a. the operator with the newer licence must yield the frequency to the more
  1052. experienced licensee
  1053. b. the station with the lower power output must yield the frequency to the station with
  1054. the higher power output
  1055. c. both stations have an equal right to operate on the frequency, the second-comer
  1056. courteously giving way after checking that the frequency is in use
  1057. d. stations in ITU Regions 1 and 2 must yield the frequency to stations in Region 3
  1058. ==================
  1059. 34
  1060. Section 3 – Electronics Fundamentals
  1061. Conductors, Insulators, and Semiconductors
  1062. The following materials conduct electricity well, thus are called conductors (in order of conductivity)
  1063. - Silver
  1064. - Copper
  1065. - Aluminum
  1066. - Most other metals
  1067. Insulators that do not conduct electricity include - Plastics
  1068. - Ceramics
  1069. - Glass
  1070. - Porcelain - Air
  1071. Semiconductors do not insulate, but they do not conduct electricity well. Some common semiconductors are
  1072. - Silicon
  1073. - Germanium
  1074. There are 2 types of semiconductors – n-type and p-type.
  1075. n-type – the current is carried by the electrons
  1076. p-type – the current is carried by the holes (or missing electrons)
  1077. Thermodynamics
  1078. As the temperature of an object increases, the atoms vibrate more. In conductors and semiconductors, this causes their resistance to increase slightly.
  1079. Atomic Structure
  1080. An atom is made of a nucleus, containing protons and neutrons, and of electrons that orbit the nucleus. Protons have a positive charge, Electrons have a negative charge.
  1081. Parts of the Atom
  1082. All atoms are more or less the same size, but different atoms are made differently. The atom is made of tiny bits of energy called subatomic particles, and each type of atom has a different number of particles. These particles are organized inside the atom in a definite pattern.
  1083. Because the particles are not matter themselves, just energy, they don't behave like matter. Sometimes it is useful to imagine them like little balls, and often diagrams of the atom show them that way, but subatomic
  1084. 
  1085. 35
  1086. particles are definitely not little balls. Subatomic particles are truly weird. Yet the way they act explains a great many things about matter, such as compounds, elements, nuclear bombs, electricity, and how you digest your food, to name only a few.
  1087. Structure of the Atom
  1088. Around the outside of the atom there are tiny particles called electrons. Electrons move constantly. Each electron has a negative electrical charge. Electrons can move away from the atom sometimes. They can be shared between atoms, or they can go from one atom to another. Electrons can even move through matter, which is what causes electricity. Electrons are very light and incredibly small.
  1089. In the centre of the atom (the nucleus) are the bigger, heavier parts of the atom. There are two types of particle in the nucleus. One of them is the neutron, a particle with no charge. The other type of particle is the proton, a particle with a positive charge.
  1090. Is this what an atom looks like? Well, no, not really.
  1091. Is it a diagram which shows some basic ideas about the atom? Yes.
  1092. Electricity is the flow of electrons. In metallic compounds, the electrons are free to flow from one atom to another, thus the metallic compound can conduct electricity.
  1093. An insulator will not share its electrons, and thus because the electrons can not leave their atom, they do not conduct electricity.
  1094. A normal atom will have the same number of electrons as protons. The positive and negative charges will cancel out. If an atom has to many or to few electrons, the charges will not cancel. This type of atom is called an ion. It will have a charge. To few electrons and the ion will have a positive charge. To many electrons and it will have a negative charge.
  1095. 
  1096. 36
  1097. Electricity sources
  1098. A battery is a common source of electricity. It has a negative terminal, that has to many electrons in it, and a positive terminal, that has to few electrons in it. The flow of electricity, called current, is made from the electrons traveling. Current as we know it goes from positive to negative. However, if you could see what was happening in the wire, the electronics would really be traveling from negative to positive.
  1099. Some batteries can be recharged. A common example is the lead acid battery.
  1100. Magnetism
  1101. A magnet will have a North and South Pole. Like poles repel each other and opposite poles attract. Any wire carrying electric current will produce a magnetic field circling the wire.
  1102. Question File: 3. Electronics Fundamentals: (2 questions)
  1103. 1. The element Silicon is:
  1104. a. a conductor
  1105. b. an insulator
  1106. c. a superconductor
  1107. d. a semiconductor
  1108. ==================
  1109. 2. An element which falls somewhere between being an insulator and a conductor is
  1110. called a:
  1111. a. P-type conductor
  1112. b. intrinsic conductor
  1113. c. semiconductor
  1114. d. N-type conductor
  1115. ==================
  1116. 3. In an atom:
  1117. a. the protons and the neutrons orbit the nucleus in opposite directions
  1118. b. the protons orbit around the neutrons
  1119. c. the electrons orbit the nucleus
  1120. d. the electrons and the neutrons orbit the nucleus
  1121. ==================
  1122. 4. An atom that loses an electron becomes:
  1123. a. a positive ion
  1124. b. an isotope
  1125. c. a negative ion
  1126. d. a radioactive atom
  1127. ==================
  1128. 5. An electric current passing through a wire will produce around the conductor:
  1129. a. an electric field
  1130. b. a magnetic field
  1131. c. an electrostatic field
  1132. d. nothing
  1133. ==================
  1134. 6. These magnetic poles repel:
  1135. a. unlike
  1136. b. like
  1137. c. positive
  1138. d. negative
  1139. ==================
  1140. 7. A common use for a permanent magnet is:
  1141. a. A computer speaker
  1142. b. An optical mouse
  1143. c. A keyboard
  1144. d. A magnetic loop antenna
  1145. ==================
  1146. 8. The better conductor of electricity is:
  1147. a. copper
  1148. b. carbon
  1149. c. silicon
  1150. d. aluminium
  1151. ==================
  1152. 9. The term describing opposition to electron flow in a metallic circuit is:
  1153. a. current
  1154. b. voltage
  1155. c. resistance
  1156. d. power
  1157. ==================
  1158. 10. The substance which will most readily allow an electric current to flow is:
  1159. a. an insulator
  1160. b. a conductor
  1161. c. a resistor
  1162. d. a dielectric
  1163. ==================
  1164. 11. The plastic coating formed around wire is:
  1165. a. an insulator
  1166. b. a conductor
  1167. c. an inductor
  1168. d. a magnet
  1169. ==================
  1170. 12. The following is a source of electrical energy:
  1171. a. p-channel FET
  1172. b. carbon resistor
  1173. c. germanium diode
  1174. d. lead acid battery
  1175. ==================
  1176. 37
  1177. 38
  1178. 13. An important difference between a common torch battery and a lead acid battery is that only the lead acid battery:
  1179. a. has two terminals
  1180. b. contains an electrolyte
  1181. c. can be re-charged
  1182. d. can be effectively discharged
  1183. ==================
  1184. 14. As temperature increases, the resistance of a metallic conductor:
  1185. a. increases
  1186. b. decreases
  1187. c. remains constant
  1188. d. become a negative
  1189. ==================
  1190. 15. In an n-type semiconductor, the current carriers are:
  1191. a. holes
  1192. b. electrons
  1193. c. positive ions
  1194. d. photons
  1195. ==================
  1196. 16. In a p-type semiconductor, the current carriers are:
  1197. a. photons
  1198. b. electrons
  1199. c. positive ions
  1200. d. holes
  1201. ==================
  1202. 17. An electrical insulator:
  1203. a. lets electricity flow through it in one direction
  1204. b. does not let electricity flow through it
  1205. c. lets electricity flow through it when light shines on it
  1206. d. lets electricity flow through it
  1207. ==================
  1208. 18. Four good electrical insulators are:
  1209. a. plastic, rubber, wood, carbon
  1210. b. glass, wood, copper, porcelain
  1211. c. paper, glass, air, aluminium
  1212. d. glass, air, plastic, porcelain
  1213. ==================
  1214. 19. Three good electrical conductors are:
  1215. a. copper, gold, mica
  1216. b. gold, silver, wood
  1217. c. gold, silver, aluminium
  1218. d. copper, aluminium, paper
  1219. ==================
  1220. 20. The name for the flow of electrons in an electric circuit is:
  1221. a. voltage
  1222. b. resistance
  1223. c. capacitance
  1224. d. current
  1225. ==================
  1226. 39
  1227. Section 4 – Measurement
  1228. Electrical properties are measured in units. Some common units are listed below
  1229. 40
  1230. Measure
  1231. Measured in (Unit)
  1232. Symbol
  1233. Electrical Potential Difference (E)
  1234. Volt
  1235. V
  1236. Electric Current (I)
  1237. Ampere (Amp)
  1238. A
  1239. Electric Resistance or Impedance (R or Z)
  1240. Ohm
  1241. Ω
  1242. Power (W)
  1243. Watt
  1244. W
  1245. Capacitance (C)
  1246. Farad
  1247. F
  1248. Inductance (L)
  1249. Henry
  1250. H
  1251. Electrical Charge
  1252. Coulomb
  1253. C
  1254. All these units can be assigned multipliers – just like a kilometer equates to 1000 meters, a kilovolt would equate to 1000 volts.
  1255. Common multipliers are listed below
  1256. Multiplier
  1257. Symbol
  1258. multiply by
  1259. Pico
  1260. p
  1261. 0.000000000001
  1262. Nano
  1263. n
  1264. 0.000000001
  1265. Micro
  1266. μ
  1267. 0.000001
  1268. Milli
  1269. m
  1270. 0.001
  1271. Kilo
  1272. k
  1273. 1000
  1274. Mega
  1275. M
  1276. 1000000
  1277. Giga
  1278. G
  1279. 1000000000
  1280. T era
  1281. T
  1282. 1000000000000
  1283. Thus a milliamp would be 0.001 of an amp, or one thousandth of an amp. A kilohm is 1000 ohms or one thousand ohms.
  1284. Impedance, like resistance, is measured in ohms, but is takes into account the reactance of an AC circuit.
  1285. Question File: 4. Measurement Units: (1 question)
  1286. 1. The unit of impedance is the:
  1287. a. ampere
  1288. b. farad
  1289. c. henry
  1290. d. ohm
  1291. ==================
  1292. 2. One kilohm is:
  1293. a. 10 ohm
  1294. b. 0.01 ohm
  1295. c. 0.001 ohm
  1296. d. 1000 ohm
  1297. ==================
  1298. 3. One kilovolt is equal to:
  1299. a. 10 volt
  1300. b. 100 volt
  1301. c. 1000 volt
  1302. d. 10,000 volt
  1303. ==================
  1304. 4. One quarter of one ampere may be written as:
  1305. a. 250 microampere
  1306. b. 0.5 ampere
  1307. c. 0.25 milliampere
  1308. d. 250 milliampere
  1309. ==================
  1310. 5. The watt is the unit of:
  1311. a. power
  1312. b. magnetic flux
  1313. c. electromagnetic field strength
  1314. d. breakdown voltage
  1315. ==================
  1316. 6. The voltage 'two volt' is also:
  1317. a. 2000 mV
  1318. b. 2000 kV
  1319. c. 2000 uV
  1320. d. 2000 MV
  1321. ==================
  1322. 7. The unit for potential difference between two points in a circuit is the:
  1323. a. ampere
  1324. b. volt
  1325. c. ohm
  1326. d. coulomb
  1327. ==================
  1328. 41
  1329. 8. Impedance is a combination of:
  1330. a. reactance with reluctance
  1331. b. resistance with conductance
  1332. c. resistance with reactance
  1333. d. reactance with radiation
  1334. ================== 9. One mA is:
  1335. a. one millionth of one ampere
  1336. b. one thousandth of one ampere
  1337. c. one tenth of one ampere
  1338. d. one millionth of admittance
  1339. ==================
  1340. 10. The unit of resistance is the:
  1341. a. farad
  1342. b. watt
  1343. c. ohm
  1344. d. resistor
  1345. ==================
  1346. 42
  1347. 
  1348. Section 5 – Ohms Law
  1349. 43
  1350. To use the above triangle, simply cover up the unit you wish to find out (the unknown) and use the other 2 to solve it. V is Voltage, I is Current, R is Resistance.
  1351. In some versions V is shown as E for voltage. V and E are interchangeable.
  1352. E=IxR I=E/R R=E/I
  1353. Thus is you know the voltage across a resistor, and the value of resistance, you can calculate the current through the resister as follows
  1354. I=E/R
  1355. Thus I = 9 / 18 = 0.5A
  1356. or I = 500mA
  1357. Know this triangle
  1358. 
  1359. 44
  1360. eg2
  1361. An unknown voltage is applied across a 16 ohm resister, and the current meter reads 2 amps. What is the unknown voltage?
  1362. E=IxR E = 2 x 16 E = 32V
  1363. Eg3
  1364. The markings have faded on a resistor. We know with ohms law the resistance can be calculated with known voltage and current. A circuit is set up with a battery, the unknown resistor, a voltmeter and current meter. The voltmeter reads 3V and the current meter shows 300mA.
  1365. First – the current must be put into standard units. We know 300mA = 0.3A
  1366. Ohms law tells us R = V / I Thus R = 3 / 0.3
  1367. R = 10 ohms
  1368. Question File: 5. Ohm's Law: (2 questions)
  1369. 1. The voltage across a resistor carrying current can be calculated using the formula:
  1370. a. E = I + R [voltage equals current plus resistance]
  1371. b. E = I - R [voltage equals current minus resistance]
  1372. c. E = I x R [voltage equals current times resistance]
  1373. d. E = I / R [voltage equals current divided by resistance]
  1374. ==================
  1375. 
  1376. 2. A 10 mA current is measured in a 500 ohm resistor. The voltage across the resistor will be:
  1377. a. 5 volt
  1378. b. 50 volt
  1379. c. 500 volt
  1380. d. 5000 volt
  1381. ==================
  1382. 3. The value of a resistor to drop 100 volt with a current of 0.8 milliampere is:
  1383. a. 125 ohm
  1384. b. 125 kilohm
  1385. c. 1250 ohm
  1386. d. 1.25 kilohm
  1387. ==================
  1388. 4. I = E/R is a mathematical equation describing:
  1389. a. Ohm's Law
  1390. b. Thevenin's Theorem
  1391. c. Kirchoff's First Law
  1392. d. Kirchoff's Second Law
  1393. ==================
  1394. 5. The voltage to cause a current of 4.4 ampere in a 50 ohm resistance is:
  1395. a. 2220 volt
  1396. b. 220 volt
  1397. c. 22.0 volt
  1398. d. 0.222 volt
  1399. ==================
  1400. 6. A current of 2 ampere flows through a 16 ohm resistance. The applied voltage is:
  1401. a. 8 volt
  1402. b. 14 volt
  1403. c. 18 volt
  1404. d. 32 volt
  1405. ==================
  1406. 7. A current of 5 ampere in a 50 ohm resistance produces a potential difference of:
  1407. a. 20 volt
  1408. b. 45 volt
  1409. c. 55 volt
  1410. d. 250 volt
  1411. ==================
  1412. 8. This voltage is needed to cause a current of 200 mA to flow in a lamp of 25 ohm
  1413. resistance:
  1414. a. 5 volt
  1415. b. 8 volt
  1416. c. 175 volt
  1417. d. 225 volt
  1418. ==================
  1419. 45
  1420. 46
  1421. 9. A current of 0.5 ampere flows through a resistance when 6 volt is applied. To change the current to 0.25 ampere the voltage must be:
  1422. a. increased to 12 volt
  1423. b. reduced to 3 volt
  1424. c. held constant
  1425. d. reduced to zero
  1426. ==================
  1427. 10. The current flowing through a resistor can be calculated by using the formula:
  1428. a. I = E x R [current equals voltage times resistance]
  1429. b. I = E / R [current equals voltage divided by resistance]
  1430. c. I = E + R [current equals voltage plus resistance]
  1431. d. I = E - R [current equals voltage minus resistance]
  1432. ==================
  1433. 11. When an 8 ohm resistor is connected across a 12 volt supply the current flow is:
  1434. a. 12/8amps
  1435. b. 8/12amps
  1436. c. 12-8amps
  1437. d. 12+8amps
  1438. ==================
  1439. 12. A circuit has a total resistance of 100 ohm and 50 volt is applied across it. The
  1440. current flow will be:
  1441. a. 50mA
  1442. b. 500 mA
  1443. c. 2 ampere
  1444. d. 20 ampere
  1445. ==================
  1446. 13. The following formula gives the resistance of a circuit:
  1447. a. R = I / E [resistance equals current divided by voltage]
  1448. b. R = E x I [resistance equals voltage times current
  1449. c. R = E / R [resistance equals voltage divided by resistance]
  1450. d. R = E / I [resistance equals voltage divided by current]
  1451. ==================
  1452. 14. A resistor with 10 volt applied across it and passing a current of 1 mA has a value
  1453. of:
  1454. a. 10 ohm
  1455. b. 100 ohm
  1456. c. 1 kilohm
  1457. d. 10 kilohm
  1458. ==================
  1459. 15. If a 3 volt battery causes 300 mA to flow in a circuit, the circuit resistance is:
  1460. a. 10 ohm
  1461. b. 9 ohm
  1462. c. 5 ohm
  1463. d. 3 ohm
  1464. ==================
  1465. 47
  1466. 16. A current of 0.5 ampere flows through a resistor when 12 volt is applied. The value of the resistor is:
  1467. a. 6 ohms
  1468. b. 12.5 ohms
  1469. c. 17 ohms
  1470. d. 24 ohms
  1471. ==================
  1472. 17. The resistor which gives the greatest opposition to current flow is:
  1473. a. 230 ohm
  1474. b. 1.2 kilohm
  1475. c. 1600 ohm
  1476. d. 0.5 megohm
  1477. ==================
  1478. 18. The ohm is the unit of:
  1479. a. supply voltage
  1480. b. electrical pressure
  1481. c. current flow
  1482. d. electrical resistance
  1483. ==================
  1484. 19. If a 12 volt battery supplies 0.15 ampere to a circuit, the circuit's resistance is:
  1485. a. 0.15 ohm
  1486. b. 1.8 ohm
  1487. c. 12 ohm
  1488. d. 80 ohm
  1489. ==================
  1490. 20. If a 4800 ohm resistor is connected to a 12 volt battery, the current flow is:
  1491. a. 2.5 mA
  1492. b. 25mA
  1493. c. 40A
  1494. d. 400 A
  1495. ==================
  1496. Section 6 – Resistance
  1497. A parallel resistor network
  1498. 48
  1499. Formulas
  1500. For a series resistance network, the total resistance = the sum of each individual member of the network
  1501. RT =R1 +R2 +R3 +.....
  1502. In a series network if each resistive component has the same resistance Rx, a simpler formula can be used. n = the number of resistors.
  1503. RT =Rx xn
  1504. For a parallel resistance network, the reciprocal of the total resistance = the sum of each of the reciprocal resistances
  1505. RT-1 =R1-1 +R2-1 +R3-1 +....
  1506. A series resistor network
  1507. 49
  1508. In a parallel network if each resistive component has the same resistance Rx, a simpler formula can be used. n = the number of resistors.
  1509. RT =Rx /n
  1510. Thus the following can be said
  1511. The total resistance in a series network will always be greater than any one of the resistive components
  1512. The total resistance in a parallel network will always be less than any one of the resistive components
  1513. Eg1
  1514. Calculate the total resistance in the following network
  1515. Using the series network formula, we sum the components.
  1516. Thus RT = 10 + 270 + 3900 + 100 RT = 4280Ω
  1517. Check = is RT larger than any component – 4280 is larger than 3900 - yes
  1518. 
  1519. Eg2
  1520. R1-1 = 0.0147059 R2-1 = 0.0000213 R3-1 = 0.0017857 R4-1 = 0.1
  1521. Thus RT-1 = the sum of the above = 0.1165129
  1522. RT = 8.583Ω
  1523. Check – is RT smaller than any component – RT is less than R4 10 = yes
  1524. NB. R-1 is the reciprocal of R. This is sometimes shown as the 1/x button or the x-1 button on a calculator.
  1525. Ohms law applies to all resistive networks. Beware however. Read what the question is asking. If a question asks for the total current in a network – first you must work out the total resistance across the supply, as shown above. However if a question asks for the current in a branch – you need only know the resistance of that branch.
  1526. Eg3
  1527. 50
  1528. If the current meter reads 100mA, what will the voltmeter read?
  1529. Ohms law says E = I x R
  1530. ER1 = IR1 x R1 IR1 = I in a series circuit, as all the current will pass through R1
  1531. 51
  1532. ER1 =0.1x33 ER1 = 3.3V Eg4
  1533. Ignore the wattages indicated above
  1534. A string of six 2V lamps are connected in series across a supply. What supply voltage is required so as to ensure that the lamps glow at the same brightness as a single lamp with a 2V supply?
  1535. All the resistances are equal, but unknown. However for the lamp to glow correctly, it requires 2V difference across it. Thus for 6 lamps the total voltage will be 6 x 2V = 12V.
  1536. Question File: 6. Resistance: (3 questions)
  1537. 1. The total resistance in a parallel circuit:
  1538. a. is always less than the smallest resistance
  1539. b. depends upon the voltage drop across each branch
  1540. c. could be equal to the resistance of one branch
  1541. d. depends upon the applied voltage
  1542. ==================
  1543. 2. Two resistors are connected in parallel and are connected across a 40 volt battery.
  1544. If each resistor is 1000 ohms, the total battery current is:
  1545. a. 40 ampere
  1546. b. 40 milliampere
  1547. c. 80 ampere
  1548. d. 80 milliampere
  1549. ==================
  1550. 3. The total current in a parallel circuit is equal to the:
  1551. a. current in any one of the parallel branches
  1552. b. sum of the currents through all the parallel branches
  1553. c. applied voltage divided by the value of one of the resistive elements
  1554. d. source voltage divided by the sum of the resistive elements
  1555. ==================
  1556. 
  1557. 52
  1558. 4. One way to operate a 3 volt bulb from a 9 volt supply is to connect it in:
  1559. a. series with the supply
  1560. b. parallel with the supply
  1561. c. series with a resistor
  1562. d. parallel with a resistor
  1563. ==================
  1564. 5. You can operate this number of identical lamps, each drawing a current of 250
  1565. mA, from a 5A supply:
  1566. a. 50
  1567. b. 30
  1568. c. 20
  1569. d. 5
  1570. ==================
  1571. 6. Six identical 2-volt bulbs are connected in series. The supply voltage to cause the
  1572. bulbs to light normally is:
  1573. a. 12V
  1574. b. 1.2 V
  1575. c. 6V
  1576. d. 2V
  1577. ==================
  1578. 7. This many 12 volt bulbs can be arranged in series to form a string of lights to
  1579. operate from a 240 volt power supply:
  1580. a. 12x240
  1581. b. 240+12
  1582. c. 240-12
  1583. d. 240/12
  1584. ==================
  1585. 8. Three 10,000 ohm resistors are connected in series across a 90 volt supply. The
  1586. voltage drop across one of the resistors is:
  1587. a. 30 volt
  1588. b. 60 volt
  1589. c. 90 volt
  1590. d. 15.8 volt
  1591. ==================
  1592. 9. Two resistors are connected in parallel. R1 is 75 ohm and R2 is 50 ohm. The total
  1593. resistance of this parallel circuit is:
  1594. a. 10 ohm
  1595. b. 70 ohm
  1596. c. 30 ohm
  1597. d. 40 ohm
  1598. ==================
  1599. 10. A dry cell has an open circuit voltage of 1.5 volt. When supplying a large current the voltage drops to 1.2 volt. This is due to the cell's:
  1600. a. internal resistance
  1601. b. voltage capacity
  1602. c. electrolyte becoming dry
  1603. d. current capacity
  1604. ==================
  1605. 11. A 6 ohm resistor is connected in parallel with a 30 ohm resistor. The total
  1606. resistance of the combination is:
  1607. a. 5 ohm
  1608. b. 8 ohm
  1609. c. 24 ohm
  1610. d. 35 ohm
  1611. ==================
  1612. 12. The total resistance of several resistors connected in series is:
  1613. a. less than the resistance of any one resistor
  1614. b. greater than the resistance of any one resistor
  1615. c. equal to the highest resistance present
  1616. d. equal to the lowest resistance present
  1617. ==================
  1618. 13. Five 10 ohm resistors connected in series give a total resistance of:
  1619. a. 1 ohm
  1620. b. 5 ohms
  1621. c. 10 ohms
  1622. d. 50 ohms
  1623. ==================
  1624. 14. Resistors of 10, 270, 3900, and 100 ohm are connected in series. The total
  1625. resistance is:
  1626. a. 9 ohm
  1627. b. 3900 ohm
  1628. c. 4280 ohm
  1629. d. 10 ohm
  1630. ==================
  1631. 15. This combination of series resistors could replace a single 120 ohm resistor:
  1632. a. five 24 ohm
  1633. b. six 22 ohm
  1634. c. two 62 ohm
  1635. d. five 100 ohm
  1636. ==================
  1637. 16. If a 2.2 megohm and a 100 kilohm resistor are connected in series, the total
  1638. resistance is:
  1639. a. 2.1 megohm
  1640. b. 2.11 megohm
  1641. c. 2.21 megohm
  1642. d. 2.3 megohm
  1643. ==================
  1644. 53
  1645. 17. If ten resistors of equal value R are wired in parallel, the total resistance is:
  1646. a. R
  1647. b. 10R
  1648. c. 10/R
  1649. d. R/10
  1650. ==================
  1651. 18. The total resistance of four 68 ohm resistors wired in parallel is:
  1652. a. 12 ohm
  1653. b. 17 ohm
  1654. c. 34 ohm
  1655. d. 272 ohm
  1656. ==================
  1657. 19. Resistors of 68 ohm, 47 kilohm, 560 ohm and 10 ohm are connected in parallel.
  1658. The total resistance is:
  1659. a. less than 10 ohm
  1660. b. between 68 and 560 ohm
  1661. c. between 560 and and 47 kilohm
  1662. d. greater than 47 kilohm
  1663. ==================
  1664. 20. The following resistor combination can most nearly replace a single 150 ohm
  1665. resistor:
  1666. a. four 47 ohm resistors in parallel
  1667. b. five 33 ohm resistors in parallel
  1668. c. three 47 ohm resistors in series
  1669. d. five 33 ohm resistors in series
  1670. ==================
  1671. 21. Two 120 ohm resistors are arranged in parallel to replace a faulty resistor. The
  1672. faulty resistor had an original value of:
  1673. a. 15 ohm
  1674. b. 30 ohm
  1675. c. 60 ohm
  1676. d. 120 ohm
  1677. ==================
  1678. 22. Two resistors are in parallel. Resistor A carries twice the current of resistor B
  1679. which means that:
  1680. a. A has half the resistance of B
  1681. b. B has half the resistance of A
  1682. c. the voltage across A is twice that across B
  1683. d. the voltage across B is twice that across B
  1684. ==================
  1685. 23. The smallest resistance that can be made with five 1 k ohm resistors is:
  1686. a. 50 ohm by arranging them in series
  1687. b. 50 ohm by arranging them in parallel
  1688. c. 200 ohm by arranging them in series
  1689. d. 200 ohm by arranging them in parallel
  1690. ==================
  1691. 54
  1692. 55
  1693. 24. The following combination of 28 ohm resistors has a total resistance of 42 ohm:
  1694. a. three resistors in series
  1695. b. three resistors in parallel
  1696. c. a combination of two resistors in parallel, then placed in series with another
  1697. resistor
  1698. d. a combination of two resistors in parallel, then placed in series with another two in
  1699. parallel
  1700. ==================
  1701. 25. Two 100 ohm resistors connected in parallel are wired in series with a 10 ohm resistor. The total resistance of the combination is:
  1702. a. 60 ohms
  1703. b. 180 ohms
  1704. c. 190 ohms
  1705. d. 210 ohms
  1706. ==================
  1707. 26. A 5 ohm and a 10 ohm resistor are wired in series and connected to a 15 volt
  1708. power supply. The current flowing from the power supply is:
  1709. a. 0.5 ampere
  1710. b. 1 ampere
  1711. c. 2 ampere
  1712. d. 15 ampere
  1713. ==================
  1714. 27. Three 12 ohm resistors are wired in parallel and connected to an 8 volt supply.
  1715. The total current flow from the supply is:
  1716. a. 1 ampere
  1717. b. 2 amperes
  1718. c. 3 amperes
  1719. d. 4.5 amperes
  1720. ==================
  1721. 28. Two 33 ohm resistors are connected in series with a power supply. If the current
  1722. flowing is 100 mA, the voltage across one of the resistors is:
  1723. a. 66 volt
  1724. b. 33 volt
  1725. c. 3.3 volt
  1726. d. 1 volt
  1727. ==================
  1728. 29. A simple transmitter requires a 50 ohm dummy load. You can fabricate this from:
  1729. a. four 300 ohm resistors in parallel
  1730. b. five 300 ohm resistors in parallel
  1731. c. six 300 ohm resistors in parallel
  1732. d. seven 300 ohm resistors in parallel
  1733. ==================
  1734. 56
  1735. 30. Three 500 ohm resistors are wired in series. Short-circuiting the centre resistor will change the value of the network from:
  1736. a. 1500 ohm to 1000 ohm
  1737. b. 500 ohm to 1000 ohm
  1738. c. 1000 ohm to 500 ohm
  1739. d. 1000 ohm to 1500 ohm
  1740. ==================
  1741. Section 7 – Power Calculations
  1742. As with ohms law, the power law can be read from the triangle above E = Potential Difference (Volts), P = Power (Watts), I = Current (Amps)
  1743. P=ExI E=P/I I=P/E
  1744. Learn the above triangle and remember it.
  1745. Eg1
  1746. A transmitter power amplifier requires 30mA at 300V. Calculate the DC input power. We know E and I, and thus need to calculate P
  1747. P=ExI
  1748. = 300 x 0.03
  1749. =9W Eg2
  1750. The current in a 100kΩ resistor is 10mA. What power (heat) is the resistor dissipating? We know R = 100000 and I = 0.01
  1751. Step 1 – We have I and R. We can find E using ohms law.
  1752. E=IxR
  1753. = 0.01 x 100000 = 1000V
  1754. 57
  1755. 
  1756. 58
  1757. Step 2 – Now that we know E and I calculate P P=ExI
  1758. = 1000 x 0.01 = 10W
  1759. Eg3
  1760. Two 10Ω resistors are connected in series with a 10V battery supplying current. Find the total power load.
  1761. Step 1 - Find RT for a series network RT =R1 +R2
  1762. = 10 + 10 = 20
  1763. Step 2 – Find I using ohms law I=E/R
  1764. = 10 / 20 = 0.5A
  1765. Step 3 – Find P using the power law P=ExI
  1766. = 10 x 0.5 = 5W
  1767. Question File: 7. Power calculations: (2 questions)
  1768. 1. A transmitter power amplifier requires 30 mA at 300 volt. The DC input power is:
  1769. a. 300 watt
  1770. b. 9000 watt
  1771. c. 9 watt
  1772. d. 6 watt
  1773. ==================
  1774. 2. The DC input power of a transmitter operating at 12 volt and drawing 500 milliamp
  1775. would be:
  1776. a. 6 watt
  1777. b. 12 watt
  1778. c. 20 watt
  1779. d. 500 watt
  1780. ==================
  1781. 59
  1782. 3. When two 500 ohm 1 watt resistors are connected in series, the maximum total power that can be dissipated by both resistors is:
  1783. a. 4 watt
  1784. b. 2 watt
  1785. c. 1 watt
  1786. d. 1/2 watt
  1787. ==================
  1788. 4. When two 1000 ohm 5 watt resistors are connected in parallel, they can dissipate
  1789. a maximum total power of:
  1790. a. 40 watt
  1791. b. 20 watt
  1792. c. 10 watt
  1793. d. 5 watt
  1794. ==================
  1795. 5. The current in a 100 kilohm resistor is 10 mA. The power dissipated is:
  1796. a. 1 watt
  1797. b. 10 watt
  1798. c. 100 watt
  1799. d. 10,000 watt
  1800. ==================
  1801. 6. A current of 500 milliamp passes through a 1000 ohm resistance. The power
  1802. dissipated is:
  1803. a. 0.25 watt
  1804. b. 2.5 watt
  1805. c. 25 watt
  1806. d. 250 watt
  1807. ==================
  1808. 7. A 20 ohm resistor carries a current of 0.25 ampere. The power dissipated is:
  1809. a. 1.25 watt
  1810. b. 5 watt
  1811. c. 2.50 watt
  1812. d. 10 watt
  1813. ==================
  1814. 8. If 200 volt is applied to a 2000 ohm resistor, the resistor will dissipate:
  1815. a. 20 watt
  1816. b. 30 watt
  1817. c. 10 watt
  1818. d. 40 watt
  1819. ==================
  1820. 9. The power delivered to an antenna is 500 watt. The effective antenna resistance is
  1821. 20 ohm. The antenna current is:
  1822. a. 25 amp
  1823. b. 2.5 amp
  1824. c. 10 amp
  1825. d. 5 amp
  1826. ==================
  1827. 60
  1828. 10. The unit for power is the:
  1829. a. ohm
  1830. b. watt
  1831. c. ampere
  1832. d. volt
  1833. ==================
  1834. 11. The following two quantities should be multiplied together to find power:
  1835. a. resistance and capacitance
  1836. b. voltage and current
  1837. c. voltage and inductance
  1838. d. inductance and capacitance
  1839. ==================
  1840. 12. The following two electrical units multiplied together give the unit "watt":
  1841. a. volt and ampere
  1842. b. volt and farad
  1843. c. farad and henry
  1844. d. ampere and henry
  1845. ==================
  1846. 13. The power dissipation of a resistor carrying a current of 10 mA with 10 volt across
  1847. it is:
  1848. a. 0.01 watt
  1849. b. 0.1 watt
  1850. c. 1 watt
  1851. d. 10 watt
  1852. ==================
  1853. 14. If two 10 ohm resistors are connected in series with a 10 volt battery, the battery
  1854. load is:
  1855. a. 5 watt
  1856. b. 10 watt
  1857. c. 20 watt
  1858. d. 100 watt
  1859. ==================
  1860. 15. Each of 9 resistors in a circuit is dissipating 4 watt. If the circuit operates from a 12
  1861. volt supply, the total current flowing in the circuit is:
  1862. a. 48 ampere
  1863. b. 36 ampere
  1864. c. 9 ampere
  1865. d. 3 ampere
  1866. ==================
  1867. 16. Three 18 ohm resistors are connected in parallel across a 12 volt supply. The total
  1868. power dissipation of the resistor load is:
  1869. a. 3 watt
  1870. b. 18 watt
  1871. c. 24 watt
  1872. d. 36 watt
  1873. ==================
  1874. 17. A resistor of 10 kilohm carries a current of 20 mA. The power dissipated in the resistor is:
  1875. a. 2 watt
  1876. b. 4 watt
  1877. c. 20 watt
  1878. d. 40 watt
  1879. ==================
  1880. 18. A resistor in a circuit becomes very hot and starts to burn. This is because the
  1881. resistor is dissipating too much:
  1882. a. current
  1883. b. voltage
  1884. c. resistance
  1885. d. power
  1886. ==================
  1887. 19. A current of 10 ampere rms at a frequency of 50 Hz flows through a 100 ohm
  1888. resistor. The power dissipated is:
  1889. a. 500 watt
  1890. b. 707 watt
  1891. c. 10,000 watt
  1892. d. 50,000 watt
  1893. ==================
  1894. 20. The voltage applied to two resistors in series is doubled. The total power
  1895. dissipated will:
  1896. a. increase by four times
  1897. b. decrease to half
  1898. c. double
  1899. d. not change
  1900. ==================
  1901. 61
  1902. Section 8 – Alternating Current
  1903. Direct Current DC – The current travels in one direction
  1904. Alternating Current AC – The current reverses direction periodically Frequency – The rate at which the alternating current reverses direction
  1905. Frequency is measured in Hertz (Hz)
  1906. 1Hz = 1 complete cycle per second
  1907. So in NZ we have a 50Hz mains supply, thus 50 cycles occur every second.
  1908. 62
  1909. The above is a diagram of one sinusoidal cycle. This is the purest of waves, as it is based upon a rotating circle. On the Y axis is voltage or current, and on the X axis is time.
  1910. Period – the time it takes for one cycle to occur. This is the reciprocal of frequency. T = F-1 F = T-1
  1911. Eg1
  1912. What is the time it takes for one complete cycle of a 100Hz signal? T=F-1
  1913. =100-1 = 0.01s
  1914. A harmonic is a multiple of a base signal. If a base signal was 2kHz, its 2nd harmonic would be 4kHz, and its 3rd harmonic would be 6kHz, etc.
  1915. Harmonics can occur in electronic oscillators (circuits to create AC waves), and can often be harmful as they are a common source of interference.
  1916. 63
  1917. RMS is a way of measuring the “average” voltage or current in a sine wave. It is not a real average, as this figure would be different. It allows the power and ohms laws to apply to an AC circuit. Let me say that again. RMS voltage and current values are the only values to be used in ohms law and power law.
  1918. The RMS value is 0.707 of the Peak value. (Actually it’s the reciprocal of the square root of 2, but 0.707 is close enough for us)
  1919. Thus in NZ, we have a supply voltage of 230Vac, at 50Hz. This tells us that our RMS voltage is 230V, and or frequency is 50Hz. Our peak voltage therefore, is larger than this, and can be calculated.
  1920. 230 / 0.707 = 325.3V
  1921. Eg2
  1922. Calculate the RMS current in an AC circuit, if it is known the current peaks at 10A.
  1923. 10A x 0.707 = 7.07A
  1924. Question File: 8. Alternating current: (1 question)
  1925. 1. An 'alternating current' is so called because:
  1926. a. it reverses direction periodically
  1927. b. it travels through a circuit using alternate paths
  1928. c. its direction of travel is uncertain
  1929. d. its direction of travel can be altered by a switch
  1930. ==================
  1931. 2. The time for one cycle of a 100 Hz signal is:
  1932. a. 1 second
  1933. b. 0.01 second
  1934. c. 0.0001 second
  1935. d. 10 seconds
  1936. ==================
  1937. 3. A 50 hertz current in a wire means that:
  1938. a. a potential difference of 50 volts exists across the wire
  1939. b. the current flowing in the wire is 50 amperes
  1940. c. the power dissipated in the wire is 50 watts
  1941. d. a cycle is completed 50 times in each second
  1942. ==================
  1943. 4. The current in an AC circuit completes a cycle in 0.1 second. So the frequency is:
  1944. a. 1Hz
  1945. b. 10 Hz
  1946. c. 100 Hz
  1947. d. 1000 Hz
  1948. ==================
  1949. 64
  1950. 5. An impure signal is found to have 2 kHz and 4 kHz components. This 4 kHz signal is:
  1951. a. a fundamental of the 2 kHz signal
  1952. b. a sub-harmonic of 2 kHz
  1953. c. the DC component of the main signal
  1954. d. a harmonic of the 2 kHz signal
  1955. ==================
  1956. 6. The correct name for the equivalent of 'one cycle per second' is one:
  1957. a. henry
  1958. b. volt
  1959. c. hertz
  1960. d. coulomb
  1961. ==================
  1962. 7. One megahertz is equal to:
  1963. a. 0.0001 Hz
  1964. b. 100 kHz
  1965. c. 1000 kHz
  1966. d. 10 Hz
  1967. ==================
  1968. 8. One GHz is equal to:
  1969. a. 1000 kHz
  1970. b. 10 MHz
  1971. c. 100 MHz
  1972. d. 1000 MHz
  1973. ==================
  1974. 9. The 'rms value' of a sine-wave signal is:
  1975. a. half the peak voltage
  1976. b. 1.414 times the peak voltage
  1977. c. the peak-to-peak voltage
  1978. d. 0.707 times the peak voltage
  1979. ==================
  1980. 10. A sine-wave alternating current of 10 ampere peak has an rms value of:
  1981. a. 5 amp
  1982. b. 7.07 amp
  1983. c. 14.14 amp
  1984. d. 20 amp
  1985. ==================
  1986. 65
  1987. Section 9 – Capacitors, Inductors, and Resonance
  1988. Capacitors are 2 plates of metal separated by a dielectric (possibly air).
  1989. Their Capacitance is measured in Farads (F) but as 1 Farad is very large, capacitors are often measured in picofarads for very small capacitors, or more commonly microfarads.
  1990. The closer the metal plates, the higher the capacitance, but the lower the working voltage.
  1991. Capacitors are placed in parallel to increase the total capacitance. CT =C1 +C2 +C3 +....
  1992. Capacitors have a maximum working voltage, above which point the capacitor will breakdown.
  1993. Capacitors are placed in series to increase their maximum working voltage. CET = CE1 + CE2 + CE3 + .... ( you don’t need to remember this)
  1994. A capacitor in a series circuit will block DC. It will let AC pass depending on the frequency. The higher frequency the less reactance it will have. Higher frequency AC flows through a capacitor easier.
  1995. Inductors are made from coiling wire around a former (possibly air).
  1996. Their inductance is measured in Henry (H), but you will more likely find them measured in micro and millihenry.
  1997. The more turns of wire, the more inductance an inductor will have.
  1998. Inductors placed in series will increase the total inductance. LT =L1 +L2 +L3 +.....
  1999. Inductors placed in parallel will decrease the total inductance. LT-1 = L1-1 + L2-1 + L3-1 +.....
  2000. Inductors will block higher frequency AC current, but will let lower frequency AC and DC current pass through. The amount of resisting to AC current in an inductor is referred to as reactance also. The higher the frequency, the higher the reactance in an inductor.
  2001. Toroidal inductors are those formed on a donut style (closed loop) former.
  2002. 66
  2003. Reactance, X
  2004. Reactance (symbol X) is a measure of the opposition of capacitance and inductance to current. Reactance varies with the frequency of the electrical signal. Reactance is measured in ohms, symbol                   .
  2005. There are two types of reactance: capacitive reactance (Xc) and inductive reactance (XL). The total reactance (X) is the difference between the two: X = XL - Xc
  2006. • Capacitive reactance, Xc
  2007. •
  2008. • For example: a 1μF capacitor has a reactance of 3.2k                   for a 50Hz signal, but when the frequency is higher at 10kHz its reactance is only 16                   .
  2009. • Inductive reactance, XL
  2010. •
  2011. • For example: a 1mH inductor has a reactance of only 0.3                   for a 50Hz signal, but when the frequency is higher at 10kHz its reactance is 63                   .
  2012. Transformers are 2 separate inductors wound on a common former, used to change an AC voltage. The voltages can be worked out by the turns ratio.
  2013. Eg. A transformer has 100 turns on its primary winding, and 10 turns on its secondary winding. 230V is applied to the primary. What voltage would appear on the secondary winding?
  2014. The turns ratio is 100 – 10 or simplified down 10 – 1
  2015. Thus every 10 Volts on the primary creates 1 Volt on the secondary for this transformer. So 230V on the primary of this transformer would give us 23V on the secondary.
  2016. Xc =
  2017. 1
  2018. 2 fC
  2019. where:
  2020. Xc = reactance in ohms (                   )
  2021. f = frequency in hertz (Hz)
  2022. C = capacitance in farads (F)
  2023. Xc is large at low frequencies and small at high frequencies.
  2024. For steady DC which is zero frequency, Xc is infinite (total opposition), hence the rule that capacitors pass AC but block DC.
  2025. XL = 2
  2026. fL
  2027. where:
  2028. XL = reactance in ohms ( )
  2029. f = frequency in hertz (Hz) L = inductance in henrys (H)
  2030. XL is small at low frequencies and large at high frequencies.
  2031. For steady DC (frequency zero), XL is zero (no opposition),
  2032. hence the rule that inductors pass DC but block high frequency AC.
  2033. 67
  2034. Resonance
  2035. As capacitors and inductors are complimentary components in an AC circuit, they are often used to form a resonant circuit. A resonant circuit may be used to let pass a particular frequency, or to block a particular frequency.
  2036. Series resonant circuit. Its impedance is lowest at resonance and acts as a pass filter.
  2037. Parallel resonant circuit. Its impedance is highest at resonance and acts as a notch filter.
  2038. For both circuits the following rules apply
  2039. If the capacitance is increased by a factor of 4, the resonant frequency will decrease to half.
  2040. If the inductance is decreased by a factor of 4, the resonant frequency will increase by a factor of 2.
  2041. The selectivity of a filter is measured by it’s Q.
  2042. A high Q filter is highly selective, where as a low Q filter will not be as selective.
  2043. Question File: 9. Capacitors, Inductors, Resonance: (2 questions)
  2044. 1. The total capacitance of two or more capacitors in series is:
  2045. a. always less than that of the smallest capacitor
  2046. b. always greater than that of the largest capacitor
  2047. c. found by adding each of the capacitances together
  2048. d. found by adding the capacitances together and dividing by their total number
  2049. ==================
  2050. 
  2051. 2. Filter capacitors in power supplies are sometimes connected in series to:
  2052. a. withstand a greater voltage than a single capacitor can withstand
  2053. b. increase the total capacity
  2054. c. reduce the ripple voltage further
  2055. d. resonate the filter circuit
  2056. ==================
  2057. 3. A component is identified as a capacitor if its value is measured in:
  2058. a. microvolts
  2059. b. millihenrys
  2060. c. megohms
  2061. d. microfarads
  2062. ==================
  2063. 4. Two metal plates separated by air form a 0.001 uF capacitor. Its value may be
  2064. changed to 0.002 uF by:
  2065. a. bringing the metal plates closer together
  2066. b. making the plates smaller in size
  2067. c. moving the plates apart
  2068. d. touching the two plates together
  2069. ==================
  2070. 5. The material separating the plates of a capacitor is the:
  2071. a. dielectric
  2072. b. semiconductor
  2073. c. resistor
  2074. d. lamination
  2075. ==================
  2076. 6. Three 15 picofarad capacitors are wired in parallel. The value of the combination
  2077. is:
  2078. a. 45 picofarad
  2079. b. 18 picofarad
  2080. c. 12 picofarad
  2081. d. 5 picofarad
  2082. ==================
  2083. 7. Capacitors and inductors oppose an alternating current. This is known as:
  2084. a. resistance
  2085. b. resonance
  2086. c. conductance
  2087. d. reactance
  2088. ==================
  2089. 8. The reactance of a capacitor increases as the:
  2090. a. frequency increases
  2091. b. frequency decreases
  2092. c. applied voltage increases
  2093. d. applied voltage decreases
  2094. ==================
  2095. 68
  2096. 9. The reactance of an inductor increases as the:
  2097. a. frequency increases
  2098. b. frequency decreases
  2099. c. applied voltage increases
  2100. d. applied voltage decreases
  2101. ==================
  2102. 10. Increasing the number of turns on an inductor will make its inductance:
  2103. a. decrease
  2104. b. increase
  2105. c. remain unchanged
  2106. d. become resistive
  2107. ==================
  2108. 11. The unit of inductance is the:
  2109. a. farad
  2110. b. henry
  2111. c. ohm
  2112. d. reactance
  2113. ==================
  2114. 12. Two 20 uH inductances are connected in series. The total inductance is:
  2115. a. 10 uH
  2116. b. 20 uH
  2117. c. 40 uH
  2118. d. 80 uH
  2119. ==================
  2120. 13. Two 20 uH inductances are connected in parallel. The total inductance is:
  2121. a. 10 uH
  2122. b. 20 uH
  2123. c. 40 uH
  2124. d. 80 uH
  2125. ==================
  2126. 14. A toroidal inductor is one in which the:
  2127. a. windings are wound on a closed ring of magnetic material
  2128. b. windings are air-spaced
  2129. c. windings are wound on a ferrite rod
  2130. d. inductor is enclosed in a magnetic shield
  2131. ==================
  2132. 15. A transformer with 100 turns on the primary winding and 10 turns on the
  2133. secondary winding is connected to 230 volt AC mains. The voltage across the
  2134. secondary is:
  2135. a. 10 volt
  2136. b. 23 volt
  2137. c. 110 volt
  2138. d. 2300 volt
  2139. ==================
  2140. 69
  2141. 70
  2142. 16. An inductor and a capacitor are connected in series. At the resonant frequency the resulting impedance is:
  2143. a. maximum
  2144. b. minimum
  2145. c. totally reactive
  2146. d. totally inductive
  2147. ==================
  2148. 17. An inductor and a capacitor are connected in parallel. At the resonant frequency
  2149. the resulting impedance is:
  2150. a. maximum
  2151. b. minimum
  2152. c. totally reactive
  2153. d. totally inductive
  2154. ==================
  2155. 18. An inductor and a capacitor form a resonant circuit. The capacitor value is
  2156. increased by four times. The resonant frequency will:
  2157. a. increase by four times
  2158. b. double
  2159. c. decrease to half
  2160. d. decrease to one quarter
  2161. ==================
  2162. 19. An inductor and a capacitor form a resonant circuit. If the value of the inductor is
  2163. decreased by a factor of four, the resonant frequency will:
  2164. a. increase by a factor of four
  2165. b. increase by a factor of two
  2166. c. decrease by a factor of two
  2167. d. decrease by a factor of four
  2168. ==================
  2169. 20. A "high Q" resonant circuit is one which:
  2170. a. carries a high quiescent current
  2171. b. is highly selective
  2172. c. has a wide bandwidth
  2173. d. uses a high value inductance
  2174. ==================
  2175. 71
  2176. Section 10 – Safety
  2177. First rule of safety – Your own safety is paramount. Never do anything that will put your own safety at risk.
  2178. Eg. You find someone unconscious near a high voltage electricity supply. Your first call is to isolate (turn off) the power, before approaching the person to check his well-being. He may still be connected to the supply, and approaching him may mean you end up on the floor beside him.
  2179. Never work on any Mains appliance unless you are competent to do so.
  2180. Before working on an appliance that uses mains supply, always turn the power off and remove the plug from the outlet.
  2181. In a high power transmitter, high voltages are present. The wires are well insulated to avoid short circuits within the amplifier or transmitter.
  2182. RCD = Residual Current Device. It constantly measures the phase and neutral currents in an appliance or power system. Should these 2 currents become out of balance, the RCD will disconnect the supply. This is because there is a chance that if the currents are out of balance, they could possibly be electrocuting someone.
  2183. A class 1 appliance has a metal outer, that is connected to earth. This is so that if a fault occurs where a live wire comes into contact with the metal frame, it will quickly short circuit the supply and blow the circuit protecting device (or fuse). The purpose then of the earthing conductor is to prevent the metal outer from becoming live.
  2184. 
  2185. Wiring in a 230V appliance lead
  2186. 72
  2187. Top left is the phase terminal, or Live. Connect the Red or Brown wire here.
  2188. Top right is the neutral terminal. Connect the Black or Blue wire here.
  2189. The larger bottom pin is the earth terminal. Connect the Green or the Green and Yellow wire here.
  2190. Isolating transformers are another safety device, used to remove the voltage from either the neutral or phase wire to earth. However if you were to come into contact with both the neutral and phase terminals you would still be electrocuted.
  2191. This transformer has a winding ratio of 1 – 1.
  2192. 73
  2193. Question File: 10. Safety: (1 question)
  2194. 1. You can safely remove an unconscious person from contact with a high voltage source by:
  2195. a. pulling an arm or a leg
  2196. b. wrapping the person in a blanket and pulling to a safe area
  2197. c. calling an electrician
  2198. d. turning off the high voltage and then removing the person
  2199. ==================
  2200. 2. For your safety, before checking a fault in a mains operated power supply unit,
  2201. first:
  2202. a. short the leads of the filter capacitor
  2203. b. turn off the power and remove the power plug
  2204. c. check the action of the capacitor bleeder resistance
  2205. d. remove and check the fuse in the power supply
  2206. ==================
  2207. 3. Wires carrying high voltages in a transmitter should be well insulated to avoid:
  2208. a. short circuits
  2209. b. overheating
  2210. c. over modulation
  2211. d. SWR effects
  2212. ==================
  2213. 4. A residual current device is recommended for protection in a mains power circuit
  2214. because it:
  2215. a. reduces electrical interference from the circuit
  2216. b. removes power to the circuit when the phase and neutral currents are not equal
  2217. c. removes power to the circuit when the current in the phase wire equals the current
  2218. in the earth wire
  2219. d. limits the power provided to the circuit
  2220. ==================
  2221. 5. An earth wire should be connected to the metal chassis of a mains-operated
  2222. power supply to ensure that if a fault develops, the chassis:
  2223. a. does not develop a high voltage with respect to earth
  2224. b. does not develop a high voltage with respect to the phase lead
  2225. c. becomes a conductor to bleed away static charge
  2226. d. provides a path to ground in case of lightning strikes
  2227. ==================
  2228. 6. The purpose of using three wires in the mains power cord and plug on amateur
  2229. radio equipment is to:
  2230. a. make it inconvenient to use
  2231. b. prevent the chassis from becoming live in case of an internal short to the chassis
  2232. c. prevent the plug from being reversed in the wall outlet
  2233. d. prevent short circuits
  2234. ==================
  2235. 7. The correct colour coding for the phase wire in a flexible mains lead is:
  2236. a. brown
  2237. b. blue
  2238. c. yellow and green
  2239. d. white
  2240. ==================
  2241. 8. The correct colour coding for the neutral wire in a flexible mains lead is:
  2242. a. brown
  2243. b. blue
  2244. c. yellow and green
  2245. d. white
  2246. ==================
  2247. 9. The correct colour coding for the earth wire in a flexible mains lead is:
  2248. a. brown
  2249. b. blue
  2250. c. yellow and green
  2251. d. white
  2252. ==================
  2253. 10. An isolating transformer is used to:
  2254. a. ensure that faulty equipment connected to it will blow a fuse in the distribution
  2255. board
  2256. b. ensure that no voltage is developed between either output lead and ground
  2257. c. ensure that no voltage is developed between the output leads
  2258. d. step down the mains voltage to a safe value
  2259. ==================
  2260. 74
  2261. Section 11 – Semiconductors
  2262. Diode
  2263. A diode is an electronic device used to conduct current in one direction only. It is made from 2 types of semiconductor – P material and N material. The electrons, when forward biased (or forward voltaged) will pass from the N material to the P material. During this process some voltage is lost. For Silicon this is 0.7V. For Germanium it is 0.3V. Silicon
  2264. diodes are often used in power supplies to convert Diodes also have a maximum reverse voltage that, exceeded, will destroy the diode.
  2265. Diodes have 2 connections, the anode and the Current flows only from the anode to the cathode.
  2266. Diodes are also used to recover information from a radio signal, a process called demodulating.
  2267. AC into DC. once
  2268. cathode.
  2269. received
  2270. 75
  2271. Zener diodes have a lower reverse voltage, and with proper current limiting, can be used to create a regulated voltage source.
  2272. A varactor diode has variable capacitance.
  2273. Transistors are an electronic component used to amplify current. The most common form of transistor is a bipolar transistor. These come in 2 varieties – the NPN and the PNP transistor. They have 3 terminals, the base, the collector, and the emitter.
  2274. If the base is above (for NPN) or below (for PNP) the voltage at the emitter, by more than 0.7V, (as they are a Silicon device) the transistor will turn on. If the base is at the same potential as the emitter, the transistor will be off.
  2275. Transistors can be destroyed by excessive voltage, current, or heat. (created by a combination of excessive current x voltage or power)
  2276. A simple transistor circuit is shown below.
  2277. 
  2278. 76
  2279. Pressing the push button will allow a small current to flow through the base and out the emitter. The transistor will then allow a much larger current to flow from the collector to the emitter thus turning the LED (Light Emitting Diode) on.
  2280. Field Effect transistors have similar properties to Bipolar transistors, but have much higher gain. This is because the gate has a much higher impedance than the base of the bipolar transistor. The symbol for the JFET is shown below. The gate is the terminal with the arrow, the other terminals are called the source and drain. The one on the left is an N channel JFET, and the one on the right is a P channel JFET
  2281. Question File: 11. Semiconductors: (2 questions)
  2282. 1. The basic semiconductor amplifying device is a:
  2283. a. diode
  2284. b. transistor
  2285. c. pn-junction
  2286. d. silicon gate
  2287. ==================
  2288. 2. Zener diodes are normally used as:
  2289. a. RF detectors
  2290. b. AF detectors
  2291. c. current regulators
  2292. d. voltage regulators
  2293. ==================
  2294. 3. The voltage drop across a germanium signal diode when conducting is about:
  2295. a. 0.3V
  2296. b. 0.6V
  2297. c. 0.7V
  2298. d. 1.3V
  2299. ==================
  2300. 4. A bipolar transistor has three terminals named:
  2301. a. base, emitter and drain
  2302. b. collector, base and source
  2303. c. emitter, base and collector
  2304. d. drain, source and gate
  2305. ==================
  2306. 5. The three leads from a PNP transistor are named the:
  2307. a. collector, source, drain
  2308. b. gate, source, drain
  2309. c. drain, base, source
  2310. d. collector, emitter, base
  2311. ==================
  2312. 6. A low-level signal is applied to a transistor circuit input and a higher-level signal is
  2313. present at the output. This effect is known as:
  2314. a. amplification
  2315. b. detection
  2316. c. modulation
  2317. d. rectification
  2318. ==================
  2319. 7. The type of rectifier diode in almost exclusive use in power supplies is:
  2320. a. lithium
  2321. b. germanium
  2322. c. silicon
  2323. d. copper-oxide
  2324. ==================
  2325. 8. One important application for diodes is recovering information from transmitted
  2326. signals. This is referred to as:
  2327. a. biasing
  2328. b. rejuvenation
  2329. c. ionisation
  2330. d. demodulation
  2331. ==================
  2332. 77
  2333. 9. In a forward biased pn junction, the electrons:
  2334. a. flowfrompton
  2335. b. flowfromntop
  2336. c. remain in the n region
  2337. d. remain in the p region
  2338. ==================
  2339. 10. The following material is considered to be a semiconductor:
  2340. a. copper
  2341. b. sulphur
  2342. c. silicon
  2343. d. tantalum
  2344. ==================
  2345. 11. A varactor diode acts like a variable:
  2346. a. resistance
  2347. b. voltage regulator
  2348. c. capacitance
  2349. d. inductance
  2350. ==================
  2351. 12. A semiconductor is said to be doped when small quantities of the following are
  2352. added:
  2353. a. electrons
  2354. b. protons
  2355. c. ions
  2356. d. impurities
  2357. ==================
  2358. 13. The connections to a semiconductor diode are known as:
  2359. a. cathode and drain
  2360. b. anode and cathode
  2361. c. gate and source
  2362. d. collector and base
  2363. ==================
  2364. 14. Bipolar transistors usually have:
  2365. a. 4 connecting leads
  2366. b. 3 connecting leads
  2367. c. 2 connecting leads
  2368. d. 1 connecting lead
  2369. ==================
  2370. 15. A semiconductor is described as a "general purpose audio NPN device". This is a:
  2371. a. triode
  2372. b. silicon diode
  2373. c. bipolar transistor
  2374. d. field effect transistor
  2375. ==================
  2376. 78
  2377. 79
  2378. 16. Two basic types of bipolar transistors are:
  2379. a. p-channel and n-channel types
  2380. b. NPN and PNP types
  2381. c. diode and triode types
  2382. d. varicap and zener types
  2383. ==================
  2384. 17. A transistor can be destroyed in a circuit by:
  2385. a. excessive light
  2386. b. excessive heat
  2387. c. saturation
  2388. d. cut-off
  2389. ==================
  2390. 18. To bias a transistor to cut-off, the base must be:
  2391. a. at the collector potential
  2392. b. at the emitter potential
  2393. c. mid-way between collector and emitter potentials
  2394. d. mid-way between the collector and the supply potentials
  2395. ==================
  2396. 19. Two basic types of field effect transistors are:
  2397. a. n-channel and p-channel
  2398. b. NPN and PNP
  2399. c. germanium and silicon
  2400. d. inductive and capacitive
  2401. ==================
  2402. 20. A semiconductor with leads labelled gate, drain and source, is best described as a:
  2403. a. bipolar transistor
  2404. b. silicon diode
  2405. c. gated transistor
  2406. d. field-effect transistor
  2407. ==================
  2408. Section 12 – Device Recognition Bipolar transistors.
  2409. 80
  2410. For the NPN the arrow points outward. The PNP the arrow points in.
  2411. Field Effect transistors
  2412. The N channel arrow points in, the P channel arrow points out.
  2413. MOSFET’s
  2414. The dual gate mosfet has 2 gates, a source and a drain.
  2415. Vacuum Tubes (Valves)
  2416. P = Plate
  2417. S = Screen
  2418. G = Grid
  2419. C = Cathode
  2420. H = Heater Element
  2421. Question File: 12. Device recognition: (1 question)
  2422. 1. In the figure shown, 2 represents the:
  2423. a. collector of a pnp transistor
  2424. b. emitter of an npn transistor
  2425. c. base of an npn transistor
  2426. d. source of a junction FET
  2427. ==================
  2428. 2. In the figure shown, 3 represents the:
  2429. a. drain of a junction FET
  2430. b. collector of an npn transistor
  2431. c. emitter of a pnp transistor
  2432. d. base of an npn transistor
  2433. ==================
  2434. 81
  2435. 
  2436. 3. In the figure shown, 2 represents the:
  2437. a. base of a pnp transistor
  2438. b. drain of a junction FET
  2439. c. gate of a junction FET
  2440. d. emitter of a pnp transistor
  2441. ==================
  2442. 4. In the figure shown, 1 represents the:
  2443. a. collector of a pnp transistor
  2444. b. gate of a junction FET
  2445. c. source of a MOSFET
  2446. d. emitter of a pnp transistor
  2447. ==================
  2448. 5. In the figure shown, 2 represents the:
  2449. a. drain of a p-channel junction FET
  2450. b. collector of an npn transistor
  2451. c. gate of an n-channel junction FET
  2452. d. base of a pnp transistor
  2453. ==================
  2454. 6. In the figure shown, 3 represents the:
  2455. a. source of an n-channel junction FET
  2456. b. gate of a p-channel junction FET
  2457. c. emitter of a pnp transistor
  2458. d. drain of an n-channel junction FET
  2459. ==================
  2460. 7. In the figure shown, 2 represents the:
  2461. a. gate of a MOSFET
  2462. b. base of a dual bipolar transistor
  2463. c. anode of a silicon controlled rectifier
  2464. d. cathode of a dual diode
  2465. ==================
  2466. 8. The figure shown represents a:
  2467. a. dual bipolar transistor
  2468. b. dual diode
  2469. c. dual varactor diode
  2470. d. dual gate MOSFET
  2471. ==================
  2472. 9. In the figure shown, 3 represents the:
  2473. a. filament of a tetrode
  2474. b. anode of a triode
  2475. c. grid of a tetrode
  2476. d. screen grid of a pentode
  2477. ==================
  2478. 82
  2479. 
  2480. 10. In the figure shown, 5 represents the:
  2481. a. grid of a tetrode
  2482. b. screen grid of a tetrode
  2483. c. heater of a pentode
  2484. d. grid of a triode
  2485. ==================
  2486. 83
  2487. 
  2488. 84
  2489. Section 13 - Meters and Measuring
  2490. Ammeters.
  2491. - Have low internal resistance
  2492. - Placed in series with the item under test
  2493. - Displays the current traveling through the meter
  2494. - May short circuit if placed across a circuit by accident.
  2495. Voltmeters
  2496. - Have high internal resistance
  2497. - Placed across the item under test
  2498. - Displays the potential difference (voltage) between the 2 points of test
  2499. - Will not operate accurately if placed in series by accident.
  2500. Thus
  2501. When measuring the current drawn by a receiver from a power supply the meter should be placed in series with one of the power leads.
  2502. An Ammeter circuit measures current, it is in series and should have low internal resistance. This could be used to measure the supply current to an amplifier.
  2503. A voltmeter circuit should be in parallel and should have high resistance (ie, high ohms).
  2504. A DC ammeter could be used to measure power supply output current.
  2505. Do not put an ammeter over the car battery because it will cause a short circuit..
  2506. When measuring current in a light bulb from a dc supply meter it acts in the circuit as a very low value series resistance.
  2507. VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) in reverse = relative reflected voltage.
  2508. AC voltmeter (RMS reading volt meter) is used to measure 50Hz sign wave of known peak voltage of 1 volts, the meter reading will be 0.707 volts.
  2509. 85
  2510. True RMS = 0.707 x peak voltage in a sinusoidal wave RMS < Peak voltage
  2511. An ohmmeter measures the value of any resistance placed between its terminals
  2512. Question File: 13. Meters and Measuring: (1 question)
  2513. 1. An ohmmeter measures the:
  2514. a. value of any resistance placed between its terminals
  2515. b. impedance of any component placed between its terminals
  2516. c. power factor of any inductor or capacitor placed between its terminals
  2517. d. voltage across any resistance placed between its terminals
  2518. ==================
  2519. 2. A VSWR meter switched to the "reverse" position provides an indication of:
  2520. a. power output in watts
  2521. b. relative reflected voltage
  2522. c. relative forward voltage
  2523. d. reflected power in dB
  2524. ==================
  2525. 3. The correct instrument for measuring the supply current to an amplifier is a:
  2526. a. wattmeter
  2527. b. voltmeter
  2528. c. ammeter
  2529. d. ohmmeter
  2530. ==================
  2531. 86
  2532. 4. The following meter could be used to measure the power supply current drawn by a small hand-held transistorised receiver:
  2533. a. a power meter
  2534. b. an RF ammeter
  2535. c. a DC ammeter
  2536. d. an electrostatic voltmeter
  2537. ==================
  2538. 5. When measuring the current drawn by a light bulb from a DC supply, the meter will act in circuit as:
  2539. a. an insulator
  2540. b. a low value resistance
  2541. c. a perfect conductor
  2542. d. an extra current drain
  2543. ==================
  2544. 6. When measuring the current drawn by a receiver from a power supply, the current
  2545. meter should be placed:
  2546. a. in parallel with both receiver power supply leads
  2547. b. in parallel with one of the receiver power leads
  2548. c. in series with both receiver power leads
  2549. d. in series with one of the receiver power leads
  2550. ==================
  2551. 7. An ammeter should not be connected directly across the terminals of a 12 volt car
  2552. battery because:
  2553. a. the resulting high current will probably destroy the ammeter
  2554. b. no current will flow because no other components are in the circuit
  2555. c. the battery voltage will be too low for a measurable current to flow
  2556. d. the battery voltage will be too high for a measurable current to flow
  2557. ==================
  2558. 8. A good ammeter should have:
  2559. a. a very high internal resistance
  2560. b. a resistance equal to that of all other components in the circuit
  2561. c. a very low internal resistance
  2562. d. an infinite resistance
  2563. ==================
  2564. 9. A good voltmeter should have:
  2565. a. a very high internal resistance
  2566. b. a resistance equal to that of all other components in the circuit
  2567. c. a very low internal resistance
  2568. d. an inductive reactance
  2569. ==================
  2570. 10. An rms-reading voltmeter is used to measure a 50 Hz sinewave of known peak
  2571. voltage 14 volt. The meter reading will be about:
  2572. a. 14 volt
  2573. b. 28 volt
  2574. c. 10 volt
  2575. d. 50 volt
  2576. ==================
  2577. 87
  2578. Section 14 - Decibels
  2579. For POWER
  2580. 3dB = Double 10dB = X10
  2581. Therefore 20dB = x 100 (10dB + 10dB = 20dB, x10 x10 = x100) And23dB=x200 (10dB+10dB+3dB=23dB,x10x10x2=x200)
  2582. For VOLTAGE
  2583. 6dB = x 2 20dB = x 10
  2584. remember – dBs add together – where cascading amplifiers multiply eg.
  2585. 3 amplifiers have 4 x power gain connected in cascade (one after the other in series) each amp has 6dB gain (x4 = 2 lots of x2, thus 2 lots of 3dB = 6dB)
  2586. for 3 amps just add each of the dB’s together
  2587. so 3 lots of 6dB’s = 18dB gain
  2588. eg2
  2589. a 10dB amplifier is connected in cascade with a 3dB attenuator. Calculate the overall gain.
  2590. 10dB – 3dB = 7dB (minus for attenuation)
  2591. 88
  2592. Question File: 14. Decibels, Amplification and Attenuation: (1 question)
  2593. 1. The input to an amplifier is 1 volt rms and the output 10 volt rms. This is an increase of:
  2594. a. 3dB
  2595. b. 6dB
  2596. c. 10 dB
  2597. d. 20 dB
  2598. ==================
  2599. 2. The input to an amplifier is 1 volt rms and output 100 volt rms. This is an increase
  2600. of:
  2601. a. 10 dB
  2602. b. 20 dB
  2603. c. 40 dB
  2604. d. 100 dB
  2605. ==================
  2606. 3. An amplifier has a gain of 40 dB. The ratio of the rms output voltage to the rms
  2607. input voltage is:
  2608. a. 20
  2609. b. 40
  2610. c. 100
  2611. d. 400
  2612. ==================
  2613. 4. A transmitter power amplifier has a gain of 20 dB. The ratio of the output power to
  2614. the input power is:
  2615. a. 10
  2616. b. 20
  2617. c. 40
  2618. d. 100
  2619. ==================
  2620. 5. An attenuator network comprises two 100 ohm resistors in series with the input
  2621. applied across both resistors and the output taken from across one of them. The
  2622. voltage attenuation of the network is:
  2623. a. 3dB
  2624. b. 6dB
  2625. c. 50 dB
  2626. d. 100 dB
  2627. ==================
  2628. 6. An attenuator network has 10 volt rms applied to its input with 1 volt rms measured
  2629. at its output. The attenuation of the network is:
  2630. a. 6dB
  2631. b. 10 dB
  2632. c. 20 dB
  2633. d. 40 dB
  2634. ==================
  2635. 89
  2636. 7. An attenuator network has 10 volt rms applied to its input with 5 volt rms measured at its output. The attenuation of the network is:
  2637. a. 6dB
  2638. b. 10 dB
  2639. c. 20 dB
  2640. d. 40 dB
  2641. ==================
  2642. 8. Two amplifiers with gains of 10 dB and 40 dB are connected in cascade. The gain
  2643. of the combination is:
  2644. a. 8dB
  2645. b. 30 dB
  2646. c. 50 dB
  2647. d. 400 dB
  2648. ==================
  2649. 9. An amplifier with a gain of 20 dB has a -10 dB attenuator connected in cascade.
  2650. The gain of the combination is:
  2651. a. 8dB
  2652. b. 10 dB
  2653. c. -10 dB
  2654. d. -200 dB
  2655. ==================
  2656. 10. Each stage of a three-stage amplifier provides 5 dB gain. The total amplification is:
  2657. a. 10 dB
  2658. b. 15 dB
  2659. c. 25 dB
  2660. d. 125 dB
  2661. ==================
  2662. Section 15
  2663. Station Components
  2664. Amateur radio stations
  2665. range from the very simple to the vary elaborate and complex. Some of the common elements are considered here. This block diagram is typical of the High Frequency equipment used in an amateur station.
  2666. 90
  2667. The Transceiver
  2668. This is the centre-piece of the station and where most things happen! It contains both transmitter and receiver. These functions are treated elsewhere in this Study Guide.
  2669. The Linear Amplifier
  2670. This is switched in to provide a stronger transmitted signal at times of difficult conditions. Not an essential item and not all radio amateurs use them or find them to be necessary. It provides an amplified version of the signal fed into its input. The term "linear" means that the output signal is a replica of the waveform of the signal fed into its input - except that the amplitude of it is greater.
  2671. The Low Pass Filter
  2672. This device is designed to prevent the passing of frequencies above 30 MHz (the limit of HF and where VHF begins) from the transmitter to the antenna. It is good practice to have this item in use but it may not always be required. Many modern transceivers are already fitted with such a filter.
  2673. S W R Bridge
  2674. This little box (Standing Wave Ratio bridge - or meter) does two things. It gives a measure of the transmitter output power level. It also gives an indication of how well the antenna is working. If the feeder to the antenna is damaged or the antenna itself is faulty, a glance at this meter will indicate a problem.
  2675. The Antenna Switch
  2676. Only two positions are shown in this diagram. The switch changes between the external antenna and the "dummy load" (used for testing). In practice, the Antenna Switch may have many positions and be used for selecting between various antennas as well as the dummy load. It is general practice to use a multi-element beam antenna for operating at 14 MHz and above, and to use a "wire antenna" on frequencies below 14 MHz, but there are no hard and fast rules!
  2677. The Antenna Tuner
  2678. This name is not strictly correct. This device takes the impedance "seen looking down the antenna feedline" and corrects it for correct "match" to the output impedance of the transmitter. This device is treated elsewhere in this Study
  2679. The Dummy Antenna (Dummy Load)
  2680. The purpose of this device is to allow you to carry out adjustments to your transmitter without actually transmitting a signal on the air. It is usually a collection of carbon resistors in a can - for shielding. The can may be filled with transformer oil to assist cooling.
  2681. It is important to know the power rating for your dummy load. The time that you can use it with a high-power signal may be very short before overheating causes it to be severely damaged. Know your ratings and observe them!
  2682. The Dummy Antenna should be connected to your antenna switch as one of your antennas. The device simulates an antenna in all
  2683. respects except that it does not radiate. It usually has a
  2684. 91
  2685. 
  2686. 92
  2687. 50 ohm impedance with a low SWR of 1 to 1.
  2688. A practical unit
  2689. Sometimes an SWR Bridge, an Antenna Tuner, Antenna Switch and a Dummy Load, are all combined into the one box.
  2690. Sometimes the two SWR meters are built into one instrument - with cross-needles. The crossing point of the two needles can be read directly as the SWR value off a separate scale on the face of the meter, while each separate needle indicates the forward and reflected power on its own arc-scale. An example is in the photograph.
  2691. Question File: 15. HF Station Arrangement: (1 question)
  2692. 1. In the block diagram shown, the "linear amplifier" is:
  2693. a. an amplifier to remove distortion in signals from the transceiver
  2694. b. an optional amplifier to be switched in when higher power is required
  2695. c. an amplifier with all components arranged in-line
  2696. d. a push-pull amplifier to cancel second harmonic distortion
  2697. ==================
  2698. 2. In the block diagram shown, the additional signal path above the "linear amplifier"
  2699. block indicates that:
  2700. a. some power is passed around the linear amplifier for stability
  2701. b. "feed-forward" correction is being used to increase linearity
  2702. c. the linear amplifier input and output terminals may be short-circuited
  2703. d. the linear amplifier may be optionally switched out of circuit to reduce output power
  2704. ==================
  2705. 
  2706. 3. In the block diagram shown, the "low pass filter" must be rated to:
  2707. a. carry the full power output from the station
  2708. b. filter out higher-frequency modulation components for maximum intelligibility
  2709. c. filter out high-amplitude sideband components
  2710. d. emphasise low-speed Morse code output
  2711. ==================
  2712. 4. In the block diagram shown, the "SWR bridge" is a:
  2713. a. switched wave rectifier for monitoring power output
  2714. b. static wave reducer to minimize static electricity from the antenna
  2715. c. device to monitor the standing-wave-ratio on the antenna feedline
  2716. d. short wave rectifier to protect against lightning strikes
  2717. ==================
  2718. 5. In the block diagram shown, the "antenna switch":
  2719. a. switches the transmitter output to the dummy load for tune-up purposes
  2720. b. switches the antenna from transmit to receive
  2721. c. switches the frequency of the antenna for operation on different bands
  2722. d. switches surplus output power from the antenna to the dummy load to avoid
  2723. distortion.
  2724. ==================
  2725. 6. In the block diagram shown, the "antenna tuner":
  2726. a. adjusts the resonant frequency of the antenna to minimize harmonic radiation
  2727. b. adjusts the resonant frequency of the antenna to maximise power output
  2728. c. changes the standing-wave-ratio on the transmission line to the antenna
  2729. d. adjusts the impedance of the antenna system seen at the transceiver output
  2730. ==================
  2731. 93
  2732. 
  2733. 7. In the block diagram shown, the "dummy load" is:
  2734. a. used to allow adjustment of the transmitter without causing interference to others
  2735. b. a load used to absorb surplus power which is rejected by the antenna system
  2736. c. used to absorb high-voltage impulses caused by lightning strikes to the antenna
  2737. d. an additional load used to compensate for a badly-tuned antenna system
  2738. ==================
  2739. 8. In the block diagram shown, the connection between the SWR bridge and the antenna switch is normally a:
  2740. a. twisted pair cable
  2741. b. coaxial cable
  2742. c. quarter-wave matching section
  2743. d. short length of balanced ladder-line
  2744. ==================
  2745. 9. In this block diagram, the block designated "antenna tuner" is not normally
  2746. necessary when:
  2747. a. the antenna input impedance is 50 ohms
  2748. b. a half wave antenna is used, fed at one end
  2749. c. the antenna is very long compared to a wavelength
  2750. d. the antenna is very short compared to a wavelength
  2751. ==================
  2752. 94
  2753. 
  2754. 10. In the block diagram shown, the connection between the "antenna tuner" and the "antenna" could be made with:
  2755. a. three-wire mains power cable
  2756. b. heavy hook-up wire
  2757. c. 50 ohm coaxial cable
  2758. d. an iron-cored transformer
  2759. ==================
  2760. 95
  2761. 
  2762. 96
  2763. Section 16 Receiver Block Diagrams
  2764. How to draw them!
  2765. This is is a "block diagram" of a "superhetrodyne" receiver. Before the actual stages are discussed, consider the diagram itself. It is drawn to show the "signal flow" entirely from left to right, shown by the arrows.
  2766. It starts with the antenna (aerial) on the left. The signal flows through many stages, shown by arrows from left to right. It ends with the speaker (or phones) on the right.
  2767. The "superhet" receiver
  2768. The diagram shows a "super-sonic heterodyne" - or "superhet" - receiver, the standard pattern for receivers in general use today. The first thing to note is that three amplifiers are shown, the RF amplifier, the IF amplifier, and the AF amplifier. Let's look at each in turn.
  2769. The Radio Frequency amplifier
  2770. This provides amplification for the signal as soon as it arrives from the antenna. The amplified signal is then passed to the "mixer/oscillator". The purpose of the mixer/oscillator is to translate the frequency of the incoming signal to the "intermediate frequency", i.e. to the "IF amplifier".
  2771. The mixer stage is usually acknowledged as being the noisiest stage in the receiver so an RF amplifier is positioned ahead of it to mask that noise with a higher signal level.
  2772. The RF amplifier stage should use a low-noise amplifying device - such as a low-noise transistor - to keep the internally-generated noise of the receiver to as low as possible. All the following amplifying stages will amplify this RF stage noise as well as the signal, so a low-noise device at the start of the receiving process is very important.
  2773. 
  2774. 97
  2775. The Intermediate Frequency amplifier
  2776. It is in the IF amplifier where most of the amplification in a receiver takes place. Sometimes there may be two or more stages of IF amplification. The "IF frequency" is carefully selected, but more about that below. The filter block prior to the amplifier shapes the "passband" of the receiver.
  2777. The filter pass-band should be tailored to fit the signal being received - in the interests of keeping out unwanted noise and unwanted signals. A 500 Hz pass-band for CW reception, a 3 kHz pass-band for SSB, and 6 kHz for AM, would be typical.
  2778. From the IF stages, the signal passes to a detector. Here demodulation of the radio-frequency signal takes place to produce an audio signal.
  2779. The diagram shows a "product detector" with a Beat Frequency Oscillator - or Carrier Insertion Oscillator (CIO) - for SSB and CW reception.
  2780. The Audio Frequency amplifier
  2781. Finally the audio signal is amplified in the audio amplifier and passed on to a speaker or phones for the listener to enjoy.
  2782. Receiving a signal
  2783. The superhet receiver is really in two parts:
  2784. 1. From IF amplifier onwards, it is a "fixed frequency receiver", a receiver pre-tuned and optimised for the reception of a signal on the IF frequency.
  2785. 2. The RF amplifier and mixer/oscillator receive signals from the antenna and then convert them to the frequency of this optimum receiver - to the IF frequency. It is in the RF amplifier and mixer/oscillator sections of the receiver where the actual operator adjustment and tuning for the selection or "choice of received signal" takes place.
  2786. Tuning a Superhet Receiver
  2787. 
  2788. 98
  2789. To change the frequency of the incoming signal to the IF frequency, the tuned circuits in the RF amplifier, the mixer input, and the local oscillator, must be adjustable from the front panel. A look inside a typical conventional superhet receiver cabinet may disclose a "three-gang" tuning capacitor. Each "section" of this component tunes part of the first stages of the receiver.
  2790. Note that it is the INPUT to the mixer which is tuned by a variable capacitor - the output is fixed-tuned at the IF frequency.
  2791. The choice of Intermediate Frequency
  2792. There are two conflicts with the choice of the IF Frequency:
  2793. A low intermediate frequency brings the advantage of higher stage gain and higher selectivity using high-Q tuned circuits. Sharp pass-bands are possible for narrow-band working for CW and SSB reception.
  2794. A high intermediate frequency brings the advantage of a lower image response.
  2795. The "image frequency" problem can be seen in this example:
  2796. Consider a receiver for 10 MHz using an IF frequency of 100 kHz. The local oscillator will be on either 10.1 MHz - i.e. 100 kHz higher than the required input signal - or on 9.9 MHz. We will consider the 10.1 MHz case - but the principles are the same for the case where the oscillator is LOWER in frequency than the wanted signal frequency. .
  2797. Because of the way that mixers work, a signal at 10.2 MHz will also
  2798. be received. This is known as the IMAGE frequency.
  2799. The image rejection of a superhet receiver can be improved by having more tuned circuits set to the required input frequency, such as more tuned circuits in the RF amplifier ahead of the mixer. This brings practical construction difficulties.
  2800. Another solution is to choose a high IF frequency so that the required received frequency and the image frequency are well separated in frequency.
  2801. 
  2802. 99
  2803. Choosing an IF of 2 MHz for the 10 MHz receiver would put the local oscillator at 12 MHz, the image frequency then being at 14 MHz.
  2804. When receiving a signal at 10 MHz, it is easier to reject a signal at 14 MHz (the image in the 2 MHz IF case) than at 10.2 MHz (the image in the 100kHz IF case).
  2805. Note that the Image Frequency is TWICE the IF Frequency removed from the WANTED signal frequency - on the same side of the wanted frequency as the oscillator.
  2806. The "Double Conversion" receiver
  2807. The "double-conversion" superhet receiver brings the good points from both IF choices. A high frequency IF is first chosen to bring a satisfactory image response, followed by a low- frequency IF to bring high selectivity and gain.
  2808. Typical examples would be a 5 MHz first IF and a 100 kHz second IF - but many designs are possible. There may be front-panel-selectable quartz or mechanical filters used at either or both IF's to give added selectivity.
  2809. The only two disadvantages of the double-conversion receiver are the added complexity and the additional oscillators required. These oscillators, unless carefully shielded, can mix with each other and produce unwanted signals at spots throughout the spectrum.
  2810. Count up the number of oscillators involved - including the BFO / CIO.
  2811. The F M Receiver
  2812. A receiver for FM signals follows the same general principles as a receiver for CW and SSB reception.
  2813. 
  2814. 100
  2815. The frequency coverage for an FM receiver is different to that of a SSB / CW receiver. FM is a distinct VHF-and-higher mode. So FM receivers are for VHF and higher reception. In hand-held transceivers, the receiver will be "channelised" for switch-channel reception.
  2816. The IF amplifier is much wider in bandwidth than that of a CW/SSB receiver. So the IF amplifier will be higher in frequency - (say) 10.7 MHz.
  2817. The demodulator will usually be a "discriminator" and may even be of a "phase-lock-loop" variety. There will be a "limiter" before the descriminator to remove noise peaks and
  2818. amplitude-changes before detection of the FM signal
  2819. 
  2820. 101
  2821. Question File: 16. Receiver Block Diagrams: (2 questions)
  2822. 1. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "RF amplifier":
  2823. a. decreasesrandomfluctuationnoise
  2824. b. isarestoringfilteramplifier
  2825. c. increases the incoming signal level
  2826. d. changesthesignalfrequency
  2827. ==================
  2828. 2. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "mixer":
  2829. a. combinessignalsattwodifferentfrequenciestoproduceoneatanintermediate frequency
  2830. b. combinessidebandstoproduceastrongersignal
  2831. c. discriminates against SSB and AM signals
  2832. d. insertsacarrierwavetoproduceatrueFMsignal
  2833. ==================
  2834. 3. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the output frequency of the "oscillator" is:
  2835. a. thesameasthatoftheincomingreceivedsignal
  2836. b. thesameasthatoftheIFfrequency
  2837. c. different from both the incoming signal and IF frequencies
  2838. d. atalowaudiofrequency
  2839. ==================
  2840. 
  2841. 4. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "filter" rejects:
  2842. a. AMandRTTYsignals
  2843. b. unwantedmixeroutputs
  2844. c. noise bursts
  2845. d. broadcastbandsignals
  2846. ==================
  2847. 5. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "IF amplifier" is an:
  2848. a. isolationfrequencyamplifier
  2849. b. intelligencefrequencyamplifier
  2850. c. indeterminate frequency amplifier
  2851. d. intermediatefrequencyamplifier
  2852. ==================
  2853. 6. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "product detector":
  2854. a. producesan800Hzbeatnote
  2855. b. separatesCWandSSBsignals
  2856. c. rejects AM signals
  2857. d. translatessignalstoaudiofrequencies
  2858. ==================
  2859. 7. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "AF amplifier":
  2860. a. rejectsAMandRTTYsignals
  2861. b. amplifiesaudiofrequencysignals
  2862. c. has a very narrow passband
  2863. d. restoresambiancetotheaudio
  2864. ==================
  2865. 102
  2866. 
  2867. 8. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "BFO" stands for:
  2868. a. badfrequencyobscurer
  2869. b. basicfrequencyoscillator
  2870. c. beat frequency oscillator
  2871. d. bandfilteroscillator
  2872. ==================
  2873. 9. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, most of the receiver gain is in the:
  2874. a. RFamplifier
  2875. b. IFamplifier
  2876. c. AF amplifier
  2877. d. mixer
  2878. ==================
  2879. 10. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "RF amplifier":
  2880. a. decreasesrandomfluctuationnoise
  2881. b. masksstrongnoise
  2882. c. should produce little internal noise
  2883. d. changesthesignalfrequency
  2884. ==================
  2885. 11. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "mixer":
  2886. a. changesthesignalfrequency
  2887. b. rejectsSSBandCWsignals
  2888. c. protects against receiver overload
  2889. d. limitsthenoiseonthesignal
  2890. ==================
  2891. 103
  2892. 
  2893. 104
  2894. 12.. In the receiver shown, when receiving a signal, the output frequency of the "oscillator" is:
  2895. a. the same as that of the signal
  2896. b. the same as that of the IF amplifier
  2897. c. of constant amplitude and frequency
  2898. d. passed through the following filter
  2899. ==================
  2900. 13. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "limiter":
  2901. a. limits the signal to a constant amplitude
  2902. b. rejects SSB and CW signals
  2903. c. limits the frequency shift of the signal
  2904. d. limits the phase shift of the signal
  2905. ==================
  2906. 14. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "frequency demodulator" could be implemented with a:
  2907. a. product detector
  2908. b. phase-locked loop
  2909. c. full-wave rectifier
  2910. d. low-pass filter
  2911. ==================
  2912. 15 In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the "AF amplifier":
  2913. a. amplifies stereo signals
  2914. b. amplifies speech frequencies
  2915. c. is an all frequency amplifier
  2916. d. must be fitted with a tone control
  2917. ==================
  2918. 
  2919. 105
  2920. 16. In this receiver, an audio frequency gain control would be associated with the block labelled:
  2921. a. AF amplifier
  2922. b. frequency demodulator
  2923. c. speaker, phones
  2924. d. IF amplifier
  2925. ==================
  2926. 17. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the selectivity would be set by the:
  2927. a. AF amplifier
  2928. b. mixer
  2929. c. limiter
  2930. d. filter
  2931. ==================
  2932. 18. In the FM communications receiver shown in the block diagram, the "filter"
  2933. bandwidth is typically:
  2934. a. 3 kHz
  2935. b. 10 kHz
  2936. c. 64 kHz
  2937. d. 128 kHz
  2938. ==================
  2939. 19. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, an automatic gain control (AGC) circuit
  2940. would be associated with the:
  2941. a. speaker
  2942. b. IF amplifier
  2943. c. RF filter
  2944. d. oscillator
  2945. ==================
  2946. 
  2947. 20. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, the waveform produced by the "oscillator" would ideally be a:
  2948. a. square wave
  2949. b. pulsed wave
  2950. c. sinewave
  2951. d. hybrid frequency wave
  2952. ==================
  2953. 106
  2954. 
  2955. 107
  2956. Section 17 Receiver fundamentals
  2957. Here we look at typical specifications for receivers and at some of the features found to improve operating convenience.
  2958. Frequency stability
  2959. The ability of a receiver to stay tuned to an incoming signal for a long period is related to the frequency stability of its local oscillator. This same requirement applies to transmitters.
  2960. Metal shielding is used around oscillator coils and the components used may be especially selected for high frequency stability.
  2961. Sensitivity
  2962. The sensitivity of a receiver is its ability to receive weak signals. Selectivity is more important than sensitivity.
  2963. Noise
  2964. The first stage in the receiving block-diagram chain, the RF amplifier, sets the noise characteristics for a receiver. The RF amplifier should use a low-noise device and it should generate very little internal noise. Measurement of sensitivity requires test equipment, equipment able to measure the "signal plus noise" audio output from the receiver and the "noise alone" with no signal being received.
  2965. The ratio: (S+N)/N (i.e. signal plus noise to noise) is often used with this test for comparing receivers.
  2966. There is far more to measuring the sensitivity and other characteristics of a receiver than is often realised! Please refer to standard textbooks on the subject.
  2967. Selectivity
  2968. The ability to separate two closely spaced signals is a receiver's "selectivity". The characteristics of the filter in the IF amplifier determine the frequency response of the IF stages and the "selectivity".
  2969. The narrower the filter pass-band, the "higher" the selectivity.
  2970. The receiver pass-band should be tailored to the characteristics of the incoming signal. Too wide a pass-band and unwanted noise is received which detracts from the reception of the wanted signal.
  2971. We use bandwidth to measure selectivity. This is how wide a range of frequencies you hear with the receiver tuned to a set frequency. Filters can often be selected by a front-panel switch to provide different receiver bandwidth characteristics.
  2972. The audio stage
  2973. 108
  2974. The audio stage of a receiver amplifies the signal from the detector and raises it to a level suitable for driving headphones or a speaker.
  2975. A typical speaker is a load impedance of about 8 ohm. A transformer is generally used to match this low-impedance load to the impedance level required for the best performance of the amplifier.
  2976. There are many types of audio amplifier. The circuit shown here is to show the principles. It is typical of that in a very simple radio - with a small speaker and low audio output.
  2977. Question File: 17. Receiver Operation: (3 questions)
  2978. 1. The frequency stability of a receiver is its ability to:
  2979. a. stay tuned to the desired signal
  2980. b. track the incoming signal as it drifts
  2981. c. provide a frequency standard
  2982. d. provide a digital readout
  2983. ==================
  2984. 2. The sensitivity of a receiver specifies:
  2985. a. the bandwidth of the RF preamplifier
  2986. b. the stability of the oscillator
  2987. c. its ability to receive weak signals
  2988. d. its ability to reject strong signals
  2989. ==================
  2990. 3. Of two receivers, the one capable of receiving the weakest signal will have:
  2991. a. an RF gain control
  2992. b. the least internally-generated noise
  2993. c. the loudest audio output
  2994. d. the greatest tuning range
  2995. ==================
  2996. 4. The figure in a receiver's specifications which indicates its sensitivity is the:
  2997. a. bandwidth of the IF in kilohertz
  2998. b. audio output in watts
  2999. c. signal plus noise to noise ratio
  3000. d. number of RF amplifiers
  3001. ==================
  3002. 5. If two receivers are compared, the more sensitive receiver will produce:
  3003. a. more than one signal
  3004. b. less signal and more noise
  3005. c. more signal and less noise
  3006. d. a steady oscillator drift
  3007. ==================
  3008. 6. The ability of a receiver to separate signals close in frequency is called its:
  3009. a. noise figure
  3010. b. sensitivity
  3011. c. bandwidth
  3012. d. selectivity
  3013. ==================
  3014. 7. A receiver with high selectivity has a:
  3015. a. wide bandwidth
  3016. b. wide tuning range
  3017. c. narrow bandwidth
  3018. d. narrow tuning range
  3019. ==================
  3020. 8. The BFO in a superhet receiver operates on a frequency nearest to that of its:
  3021. a. RF amplifier
  3022. b. audio amplifier
  3023. c. local oscillator
  3024. d. IF amplifier
  3025. ==================
  3026. 9. To receive Morse code signals, a BFO is employed in a superhet receiver to:
  3027. a. produce IF signals
  3028. b. beat with the local oscillator signal to produce sidebands
  3029. c. produce an audio tone to beat with the IF signal
  3030. d. beat with the IF signal to produce an audio tone
  3031. ==================
  3032. 10. The following transmission mode is usually demodulated by a product detector:
  3033. a. pulse modulation
  3034. b. double sideband full carrier modulation
  3035. c. frequency modulation
  3036. d. single sideband suppressed carrier modulation
  3037. ==================
  3038. 11. A superhet receiver for SSB reception has an insertion oscillator to:
  3039. a. replace the suppressed carrier for detection
  3040. b. phase out the unwanted sideband signal
  3041. c. reduce the passband of the IF stages
  3042. d. beat with the received carrier to produce the other sideband
  3043. ==================
  3044. 109
  3045. 110
  3046. 12. A stage in a receiver with input and output circuits tuned to the received frequency is the:
  3047. a. RF amplifier
  3048. b. local oscillator
  3049. c. audio frequency amplifier
  3050. d. detector
  3051. ==================
  3052. 13. An RF amplifier ahead of the mixer stage in a superhet receiver:
  3053. a. enables the receiver to tune a greater frequency range
  3054. b. means no BFO stage is needed
  3055. c. makes it possible to receive SSB signals
  3056. d. increases the sensitivity of the receiver
  3057. ==================
  3058. 14. A communication receiver may have several IF filters of different bandwidths. The
  3059. operator selects one to:
  3060. a. improve the S-meter readings
  3061. b. improve the receiver sensitivity
  3062. c. improve the reception of different types of signal
  3063. d. increase the noise received
  3064. ==================
  3065. 15. The stage in a superhet receiver with a tuneable input and fixed tuned output is
  3066. the:
  3067. a. RF amplifier
  3068. b. mixer stage
  3069. c. IF amplifier
  3070. d. local oscillator
  3071. ==================
  3072. 16. The mixer stage of a superhet receiver:
  3073. a. produces spurious signals
  3074. b. produces an intermediate frequency signal
  3075. c. acts as a buffer stage
  3076. d. demodulates SSB signals
  3077. ==================
  3078. 17. A 7 MHz signal and a 16 MHz oscillator are applied to a mixer stage. The output
  3079. will contain the input frequencies and:
  3080. a. 8and9MHz
  3081. b. 7and9MHz
  3082. c. 9and23MHz
  3083. d. 3.5 and 9 MHz
  3084. ==================
  3085. 18. Selectivity in a superhet receiver is achieved primarily in the:
  3086. a. RF amplifier
  3087. b. Mixer
  3088. c. IF amplifier
  3089. d. Audio stage
  3090. ==================
  3091. 111
  3092. 19. The abbreviation AGC means:
  3093. a. attenuating gain capacitor
  3094. b. automatic gain control
  3095. c. anode-grid capacitor
  3096. d. amplified grid conductance
  3097. ==================
  3098. 20. The AGC circuit in a receiver usually controls the:
  3099. a. audio stage
  3100. b. mixer stage
  3101. c. power supply
  3102. d. RF and IF stages
  3103. ==================
  3104. 21. The tuning control of a superhet receiver changes the tuned frequency of the:
  3105. a. audio amplifier
  3106. b. IF amplifier
  3107. c. local oscillator
  3108. d. post-detector amplifier
  3109. ==================
  3110. 22. A superhet receiver, with an IF at 500 kHz, is receiving a 14 MHz signal. The local
  3111. oscillator frequency is:
  3112. a. 14.5 MHz
  3113. b. 19 MHz
  3114. c. 500 kHz
  3115. d. 28 MHz
  3116. ==================
  3117. 23. An audio amplifier is necessary in an AM receiver because:
  3118. a. signals leaving the detector are weak
  3119. b. the carrier frequency must be replaced
  3120. c. the signal requires demodulation
  3121. d. RF signals are not heard by the human ear
  3122. ==================
  3123. 24. The audio output transformer in a receiver is required to:
  3124. a. step up the audio gain
  3125. b. protect the loudspeaker from high currents
  3126. c. improve the audio tone
  3127. d. match the output impedance of the audio amplifier to the speaker
  3128. ==================
  3129. 25. If the carrier insertion oscillator is counted, then a single conversion superhet
  3130. receiver has:
  3131. a. one oscillator
  3132. b. two oscillators
  3133. c. three oscillators
  3134. d. four oscillators
  3135. ==================
  3136. 112
  3137. 26. A superhet receiver, with a 500 kHz IF, is receiving a signal at 21.0 MHz. A strong unwanted signal at 22 MHz is interfering. The cause is:
  3138. a. insufficient IF selectivity
  3139. b. the 22 MHz signal is out-of-band
  3140. c. 22 MHz is the image frequency
  3141. d. insufficient RF gain
  3142. ==================
  3143. 27. A superhet receiver receives an incoming signal of 3540 kHz and the local
  3144. oscillator produces a signal of 3995 kHz. The IF amplifier is tuned to:
  3145. a. 455 kHz
  3146. b. 3540 kHz
  3147. c. 3995 kHz
  3148. d. 7435 kHz
  3149. ==================
  3150. 28. A double conversion receiver designed for SSB reception has a carrier insertion
  3151. oscillator and:
  3152. a. one IF stage and one local oscillator
  3153. b. two IF stages and one local oscillator
  3154. c. two IF stages and two local oscillators
  3155. d. two IF stages and three local oscillators
  3156. ==================
  3157. 29. An advantage of a double conversion receiver is that it:
  3158. a. does not drift off frequency
  3159. b. produces a louder audio signal
  3160. c. has improved image rejection characteristics
  3161. d. is a more sensitive receiver
  3162. ==================
  3163. 30. A receiver squelch circuit:
  3164. a. automatically keeps the audio output at maximum level
  3165. b. silences the receiver speaker during periods of no received signal
  3166. c. provides a noisy operating environment
  3167. d. is not suitable for pocket-size receivers
  3168. ==================
  3169. How to draw them!
  3170. 113
  3171. Section 18 Transmitter Block Diagrams
  3172. This is a "block diagram" of a simple transmitter. Before the actual stages are discussed, consider the diagram itself. It is drawn to show the "signal flow" entirely from left to right, shown by the arrows.
  3173. The CW Transmitter
  3174. The simplest of all transmitters is one for sending Morse code - a CW (Continuous Wave) transmitter as shown in the diagram above
  3175. An oscillator generates the signal and it is then amplified to raise the power output to the desired level. A Morse key is used to chop the transmission up into the "dots" and "dashes" of Morse code
  3176. The oscillator runs continuously. The Driver / Buffer are isolation stages, to isolate the oscillator from the sudden load-changes due to the keying of the amplifier. This minimises frequency "chirp" on the transmitted signal.
  3177. The oscillator is usually supplied with DC from a voltage-regulated source to minimise chirp (slight changes in the output frequency) due to variations in the supply voltage.
  3178. Several driver and buffer stages may be used. The keying may be in the final amplifier alone - usually in the cathode or emitter lead - or may also be applied to the driver stage too.
  3179. A "keying relay" may be used to isolate the Morse key from the transmitter circuits, to keep high voltages away from the operator's Morse key. In the interests of operator safety, the moving bar of the Morse key is ALWAYS kept at earth potential.
  3180. The AM Transmitter
  3181. 
  3182. 114
  3183. This is a diagram of a typical Amplitude-Modulated transmitter.
  3184. The block diagram is derived from the CW transmitter.
  3185. The modulated stage is usually the final amplifier in the transmitter. This is known as "high-level" modulation. If a following amplifier is used to raise the output power level, it must be a linear amplifier.
  3186. The SSB Transmitter
  3187. A transmitter takes the generated signal and first translates it with a mixer / VFO combination to the required output frequency then amplifies it to the required power output level using a linear amplifier. A linear amplifier is needed to preserve the signal waveform in all ways except to increase the output amplitude.
  3188. The F M transmitter
  3189. The modulator can be one of several types. The simplest to understand is probably to consider the voltage- controlled oscillator
  3190. Applying an audio signal to the varicap diodes in the circuit example given in the Oscillator discussion will change the frequency of the oscillator in accord with the modulation. This increases the frequency swing with increased audio loudness, and the rate of swing with increasing audio frequency - hence providing Frequency Modulation.
  3191. 
  3192. 115
  3193. In VHF hand-held transceivers, the oscillator will be generated by a phase-locked-loop to get "channel switching" facilities. The frequency modulation may then be generated by applying the audio signal to the PLL.
  3194. The Frequency Multiplier stage is an RF amplifier with a tuned output - the output tuned to a harmonic of the input signal.
  3195. Question File: 18. Transmitter Block Diagrams: (2 questions)
  3196. 1. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "oscillator":
  3197. a. is variable in frequency
  3198. b. generates an audio frequency tone during tests
  3199. c. uses a crystal for good frequency stability
  3200. d. may have a calibrated dial
  3201. ==================
  3202. 2. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "balanced modulator":
  3203. a. balances the high and low frequencies in the audio signal
  3204. b. performs double sideband suppressed carrier modulation
  3205. c. acts as a tone control
  3206. d. balances the standing wave ratio
  3207. ==================
  3208. 3. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "filter":
  3209. a. removes mains hum from the audio signal
  3210. b. suppresses unwanted harmonics of the RF signal
  3211. c. removes one sideband from the modulated signal
  3212. d. removes the carrier component from the modulated signal
  3213. ==================
  3214. 
  3215. 4. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "mixer":
  3216. a. adds the correct proportion of carrier to the SSB signal
  3217. b. mixes the audio and RF signals in the correct proportions
  3218. c. translates the SSB signal to the required frequency
  3219. d. mixes the two sidebands in the correct proportions
  3220. ==================
  3221. 5. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "linear amplifier":
  3222. a. has all components arranged in-line
  3223. b. amplifies the modulated signal with no distortion
  3224. c. aligns the two sidebands correctly
  3225. d. removes any unwanted amplitude modulation from the signal
  3226. ==================
  3227. 6. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "VFO" is:
  3228. a. a voice frequency oscillator
  3229. b. a varactor fixed oscillator
  3230. c. a virtual faze oscillator
  3231. d. a variable frequency oscillator
  3232. ==================
  3233. 116
  3234. 
  3235. 7. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "master oscillator" produces:
  3236. a. a steady signal at the required carrier frequency
  3237. b. a pulsating signal at the required carrier frequency
  3238. c. a 800 Hz signal to modulate the carrier
  3239. d. a modulated CW signal
  3240. ==================
  3241. 8. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "driver buffer":
  3242. a. filters any sharp edges from the input signal
  3243. b. drives the power amplifier into saturation
  3244. c. provides isolation between the oscillator and power amplifier
  3245. d. changes the frequency of the master oscillator signal
  3246. ==================
  3247. 9. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "Morse key":
  3248. a. turns the DC power to the transmitter on and off
  3249. b. allows the oscillator signal to pass only when the key is depressed
  3250. c. changes the frequency of the transmitted signal when the key is depressed
  3251. d. adds an 800 Hz audio tone to the signal when the key is depressed
  3252. ==================
  3253. 117
  3254. 
  3255. 10. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "power amplifier":
  3256. a. need not have linear characteristics
  3257. b. amplifies the bandwidth of its input signal
  3258. c. must be adjusted during key-up conditions
  3259. d. should be water-cooled
  3260. ==================
  3261. 11. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "speech amplifier":
  3262. a. amplifies the audio signal from the microphone
  3263. b. is a spectral equalization entropy changer
  3264. c. amplifies only speech, while discriminating against background noises
  3265. d. shifts the frequency spectrum of the audio signal into the RF region
  3266. ==================
  3267. 12. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "modulator":
  3268. a. is an amplitude modulator with feedback
  3269. b. is an SSB modulator with feedback
  3270. c. causes the speech waveform to gate the oscillator on and off
  3271. d. causes the speech waveform to shift the frequency of the oscillator
  3272. ==================
  3273. 13. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "oscillator" is:
  3274. a. an audio frequency oscillator
  3275. b. a variable frequency RF oscillator
  3276. c. a beat frequency oscillator
  3277. d. a variable frequency audio oscillator
  3278. ==================
  3279. 118
  3280. 
  3281. 14. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "frequency multiplier":
  3282. a. translates the frequency of the modulated signal into the RF spectrum
  3283. b. changes the frequency of the speech signal
  3284. c. produces a harmonic of the oscillator signal
  3285. d. multiplies the oscillator signal by the speech signal
  3286. ==================
  3287. 15. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "power amplifier":
  3288. a. increases the voltage of the mains to drive the antenna
  3289. b. amplifies the audio frequency component of the signal
  3290. c. amplifies the selected sideband to a suitable level
  3291. d. amplifies the RF signal to a suitable level
  3292. ==================
  3293. 16. The signal from an amplitude modulated transmitter consists of:
  3294. a. a carrier and two sidebands
  3295. b. a carrier and one sideband
  3296. c. no carrier and two sidebands
  3297. d. no carrier and one sideband
  3298. ==================
  3299. 17. The signal from a frequency modulated transmitter has:
  3300. a. an amplitude which varies with the modulating waveform
  3301. b. a frequency which varies with the modulating waveform
  3302. c. a single sideband which follows the modulating waveform
  3303. d. no sideband structure
  3304. ==================
  3305. 18. The signal from a balanced modulator consists of:
  3306. a. a carrier and two sidebands
  3307. b. a carrier and one sideband
  3308. c. no carrier and two sidebands
  3309. d. no carrier and one sideband
  3310. ==================
  3311. 19. The signal from a CW transmitter consists of:
  3312. a. a continuous, unmodulated RF waveform
  3313. b. a continuous RF waveform modulated with an 800 Hz Morse signal
  3314. c. an RF waveform which is keyed on and off to form Morse characters
  3315. d. a continuous RF waveform which changes frequency in synchronism with an
  3316. applied Morse signal
  3317. ==================
  3318. 119
  3319. 
  3320. 20. The following signal can be amplified using a non-linear amplifier:
  3321. a. SSB
  3322. b. FM
  3323. c. AM
  3324. d. DSBSC
  3325. ==================
  3326. 120
  3327. 121
  3328. Section 19 Transmitter Theory
  3329. The Power Rating of a SSB linear amplifier
  3330. A power amplifier for SSB operation is required to be linear. This means that the waveform of the output signal must be a replica of the input waveform in all ways except amplitude - the output must be an amplified version of the input! The maximum power output before severe distortion takes place is the limit of successful linear amplifier operation.
  3331. The power output at the maximum level is the usual rating given for a linear amplifier. This is known as the "Peak Envelope Power", PEP.
  3332. The PEP is by definition, the average power output during one RF cycle at the crest of the modulating envelope.
  3333. The PEP rating and measurement are also sometimes used for amplifiers for other modes. The RF output power from an amplifier is less than the total DC input power and signal input power to the amplifier. The difference is energy loss and appears as heat. Cooling facilities - fans etc. - are sometimes found on solid-state power amplifiers for protection from over-heating.
  3334. Question File: 19. Transmitter Theory: (1 question)
  3335. 1. Morse code is usually transmitted by radio as:
  3336. a. an interrupted carrier
  3337. b. a voice modulated carrier
  3338. c. a continuous carrier
  3339. d. a series of clicks
  3340. ==================
  3341. 2. To obtain high frequency stability in a transmitter, the VFO should be:
  3342. a. run from a non-regulated AC supply
  3343. b. in a plastic box
  3344. c. powered from a regulated DC supply
  3345. d. able to change frequency with temperature
  3346. ==================
  3347. 3. SSB transmissions:
  3348. a. occupy about twice the bandwidth of AM transmissions
  3349. b. contain more information than AM transmissions
  3350. c. occupy about half the bandwidth of AM transmissions
  3351. d. are compatible with FM transmissions
  3352. ==================
  3353. 
  3354. 122
  3355. 4. The purpose of a balanced modulator in a SSB transmitter is to:
  3356. a. make sure that the carrier and both sidebands are in phase
  3357. b. make sure that the carrier and both sidebands are 180 degrees out of phase
  3358. c. ensure that the percentage of modulation is kept constant
  3359. d. suppress the carrier while producing two sidebands
  3360. ==================
  3361. 5. Several stations advise that your FM simplex transmission in the "two metre" band
  3362. is distorted. The cause might be that:
  3363. a. the transmitter modulation deviation is too high
  3364. b. your antenna is too low
  3365. c. the transmitter has become unsynchronised
  3366. d. your transmitter frequency split is incorrect
  3367. ==================
  3368. 6. The driver stage of a transmitter is located:
  3369. a. before the power amplifier
  3370. b. between oscillator and buffer
  3371. c. with the frequency multiplier
  3372. d. after the output low-pass filter circuit
  3373. ==================
  3374. 7. The purpose of the final amplifier in a transmitter is to:
  3375. a. increase the frequency of a signal
  3376. b. isolate the multiplier and later stages
  3377. c. produce a stable radio frequency
  3378. d. increase the power fed to the antenna
  3379. ==================
  3380. 8. The difference between DC input power and RF power output of a transmitter RF
  3381. amplifier:
  3382. a. radiates from the antenna
  3383. b. is dissipated as heat
  3384. c. is lost in the feedline
  3385. d. is due to oscillating current
  3386. ==================
  3387. 9. The process of modulation allows:
  3388. a. information to be impressed on to a carrier
  3389. b. information to be removed from a carrier
  3390. c. voice and Morse code to be combined
  3391. d. none of these
  3392. ==================
  3393. 10. The output power rating of a linear amplifier in a SSB transmitter is specified by
  3394. the:
  3395. a. peak DC input power
  3396. b. mean AC input power
  3397. c. peak envelope power
  3398. d. unmodulated carrier power
  3399. ==================
  3400. Harmonics
  3401. 123
  3402. Section 20
  3403. Harmonics and Parasitics
  3404. Harmonics are multiples of a transmitted frequency which are the result of a non-linear action. They are present in any signal which has a distorted sinewave. Harmonics are the even or odd multiple of the fundamental transmitted frequency. For example, a transmitter at 3.5 MHz would have harmonics at 7, 10.5, 14, etc MHz.
  3405. Harmonics are typically produced by an over-driven stage somewhere in the system. An example is over-modulation of a transmitter ("flat-topping"). Reducing the microphone gain in this case will significantly reduce the harmonic output.
  3406. Harmonic interference occurs at distinct frequencies.
  3407. Harmonics should be suspected if a transmitter on a lower frequency causes interference to a frequency which is a multiple of it. For example, a transmitter on the 10m band, at say 28 MHz, could cause interference to a television receiver receiving on TV Channel 2, which is 54 to 61 MHz. The probable cause is the second harmonic 2 x 28 = 56 MHz.
  3408. For TV and other frequency use, refer to the NZART CallBook (Page 8-9 in the 1998/99 edition) for the New Zealand Radio Spectrum Usage. This information is also available from the Ministry of Commerce web page - look for document PIB21 at: http://www.rsm.govt.nz/cms/tools-and-services/publications/public-information-brochures-pibs/pib-21- table-of-radio-spectrum-usage-in-new-zealand-1
  3409. Harmonics can be produced within transmitters and receivers or outside of both. Harmonics generated within a transmitter must be filtered out. A filter in the output lead is usually installed by manufacturers. External filters are also used.
  3410. Harmonics generated within a receiver generally cause cross- modulation or intermodulation.
  3411. Harmonics can also be generated by external causes - for example a bad connection between two metal surfaces, e.g. gutters, metal roofing, and antennas. The joint can oxidise and form a poor quality diode which when excited by an RF field produces harmonics
  3412. Harmonics which are not exactly on the frequency being received can sometimes be removed with a selective filter - band reject, high pass or low pass.
  3413. Generally, harmonics should be suppressed at their source.
  3414. 
  3415. 124
  3416. Parasitic oscillations
  3417. With parasitic signals there is no simple mathematical relationship between the operating frequency and the interfering frequency. The effects may be the same as with harmonics - a VHF receiver being interfered with by a HF transmission. The cause is an additional and undesired oscillation from an oscillator or amplifier for which it was not designed. The circuit functions normally but the parasitic oscillation occurs simultaneously.
  3418. Parasitics are suppressed by adding additional components to the circuit to suppress the undesired oscillation without affecting the primary function of the circuit. A typical solution is to add a VHF choke (an inductor) or a small-value resistor (a "stopper") somewhere close to the active component in the offending circuit.
  3419. Question File: 20. Harmonics and Parasitics: (2 questions)
  3420. 1. A harmonic of a signal transmitted at 3525 kHz would be expected to occur at:
  3421. a. 3573 kHz
  3422. b. 7050 kHz
  3423. c. 14025 kHz
  3424. d. 21050 kHz
  3425. ==================
  3426. 2. The third harmonic of 7 MHz is:
  3427. a. 10 MHz
  3428. b. 14 MHz
  3429. c. 21 MHz
  3430. d. 28 MHz
  3431. ==================
  3432. 3. The fifth harmonic of 7 MHz is:
  3433. a. 12 MHz
  3434. b. 19 MHz
  3435. c. 28 MHz
  3436. d. 35 MHz
  3437. ==================
  3438. 4. Excessive harmonic output may be produced in a transmitter by:
  3439. a. a linear amplifier
  3440. b. a low SWR
  3441. c. resonant circuits
  3442. d. overdriven amplifier stages
  3443. ==================
  3444. 5. Harmonics may be produced in the RF power amplifier of a transmitter if:
  3445. a. the modulation level is too low
  3446. b. the modulation level is too high
  3447. c. the oscillator frequency is unstable
  3448. d. modulation is applied to more than one stage
  3449. ==================
  3450. 6. Harmonics produced in an early stage of a transmitter may be reduced in a later stage by:
  3451. a. increasing the signal input to the final stage
  3452. b. using FET power amplifiers
  3453. c. using tuned circuit coupling between stages
  3454. d. using larger value coupling capacitors
  3455. ==================
  3456. 7. Harmonics are produced when:
  3457. a. a resonant circuit is detuned
  3458. b. negative feedback is applied to an amplifier
  3459. c. a transistor is biased for class A operation
  3460. d. a sine wave is distorted
  3461. ==================
  3462. 8. Harmonic frequencies are:
  3463. a. always lower in frequency than the fundamental frequency
  3464. b. at multiples of the fundamental frequency
  3465. c. any unwanted frequency above the fundamental frequency
  3466. d. any frequency causing TVI
  3467. ==================
  3468. 9. An interfering signal from a transmitter has a frequency of 57 MHz. This signal
  3469. could be the:
  3470. a. seventh harmonic of an 80 meter transmission
  3471. b. third harmonic of a 15 metre transmission
  3472. c. second harmonic of a 10 metre transmission
  3473. d. crystal oscillator operating on its fundamental
  3474. ==================
  3475. 10. To minimise the radiation of one particular harmonic, one can use a:
  3476. a. wave trap in the transmitter output
  3477. b. resistor
  3478. c. high pass filter in the transmitter output
  3479. d. filter in the receiver lead
  3480. ==================
  3481. 11. A low-pass filter is used in the antenna lead from a transmitter:
  3482. a. to reduce key clicks developed in a CW transmitter
  3483. b. to increase harmonic radiation
  3484. c. to eliminate chirp in CW transmissions
  3485. d. to reduce radiation of harmonics
  3486. ==================
  3487. 12. The following is installed in the transmission line as close as possible to a HF
  3488. transmitter to reduce harmonic output:
  3489. a. a middle-pass filter
  3490. b. a low-pass filter
  3491. c. a high-pass filter
  3492. d. a band-reject filter
  3493. ==================
  3494. 125
  3495. 13. A low pass filter will:
  3496. a. suppress sub-harmonics
  3497. b. reduce harmonics
  3498. c. always eliminate interference
  3499. d. improve harmonic radiation
  3500. ==================
  3501. 14. A spurious transmission from a transmitter is:
  3502. a. an unwanted emission unrelated to the output signal frequency
  3503. b. an unwanted emission that is harmonically related to the modulating audio
  3504. frequency
  3505. c. generated at 50 Hz
  3506. d. the main part of the modulated carrier
  3507. ==================
  3508. 15. A parasitic oscillation:
  3509. a. is an unwanted signal developed in a transmitter
  3510. b. is generated by parasitic elements of a Yagi beam
  3511. c. does not cause any radio interference
  3512. d. is produced in a transmitter oscillator stage
  3513. ==================
  3514. 16. Parasitic oscillations in a RF power amplifier can be suppressed by:
  3515. a. pulsing the supply voltage
  3516. b. placing suitable chokes, ferrite beads or resistors within the amplifier
  3517. c. screening all input leads
  3518. d. using split-stator tuning capacitors
  3519. ==================
  3520. 17. Parasitic oscillations in the RF power amplifier stage of a transmitter may occur:
  3521. a. at low frequencies only
  3522. b. on harmonic frequencies
  3523. c. at high frequencies only
  3524. d. at high or low frequencies
  3525. ==================
  3526. 18. Transmitter power amplifiers can generate parasitic oscillations on:
  3527. a. the transmitter's output frequency
  3528. b. harmonics of the transmitter's output frequency
  3529. c. frequencies unrelated to the transmitter's output frequency
  3530. d. VHF frequencies only
  3531. ==================
  3532. 19. Parasitic oscillations tend to occur in:
  3533. a. high voltage rectifiers
  3534. b. high gain amplifier stages
  3535. c. antenna matching circuits
  3536. d. SWR bridges
  3537. ==================
  3538. 126
  3539. 20. Parasitic oscillations can cause interference. They are:
  3540. a. always the same frequency as the mains supply
  3541. b. always twice the operating frequency
  3542. c. not related to the operating frequency
  3543. d. three times the operating frequency
  3544. ==================
  3545. 127
  3546. 128
  3547. Section 21 Power Supplies
  3548. The typical power supply
  3549. The purpose of a power supply is to take electrical energy in one form and convert it into another. The usual example is to take supply from 230V AC mains and convert it into smooth DC.
  3550. This DC may be at 200 volt to provide (say) 200 mA as the high tension source for valve operation, or 5 volt at (say) 1 Amp to feed transistors and other solid-state devices.
  3551. The above diagram shows the separate stages in this conversion. Each will be considered in turn.
  3552. Protection
  3553. There should always be a fuse in the phase or active AC mains lead for protection if a fault develops in the equipment. The fuse should be of the correct rating for the task.
  3554. Keep some spare fuses handy!
  3555. The transformer
  3556. When two inductors (or more) are mounted together so their electromagnetic fields interact, we have a
  3557. transformer. A power supply almost invariably,
  3558. contains a transformer.
  3559. 
  3560. 129
  3561. A transformer generally comprises two (or more) sets of coils (or windings) on a single core, designed so that maximum interaction and magnetic coupling takes place. The windings are insulated from each other and insulated from the core. The windings may be wound on top of each other.
  3562. At low frequencies the core may be made up from thin laminated soft-iron plates forming closed loops and designed to reduce eddy current losses. At higher frequencies the core may be dust-iron, ceramic ferrite, or air-cored (as for RF coils).
  3563. The winding used to generate the magnetic flux is called the primary (connected to the AC supply). The winding in which current is induced is the secondary (or secondaries).
  3564. The input supply must be an alternating current. The input current sets up a changing magnetic field around the input or primary winding. That field sweeps the secondary and induces a current in that secondary winding.
  3565. The "turns ratio"
  3566. The number of turns on each winding determines the output voltage from the transformer. The output voltage from the secondary is proportional to the ratio of the turns on the windings.
  3567. For example, if the secondary has half as many turns as there are on the primary, and 100V AC is applied to the primary, the output will be 50V.
  3568. Transformers can be step-up or step-down (in voltage). With twice as many turns on the secondary as there are on the primary and 100 V applied, the output would be 200V.
  3569. A function of the transformer is to provide an AC supply at a voltage suitable for rectifying to produce a stated DC output.
  3570. The power output from the secondary cannot exceed the power fed into the primary. Ignoring losses, a step-down in voltage means that an increase in current from that lower- voltage winding is possible. Similarly, a step-up in voltage means a decrease in the current output. So the gauge of wire used for the secondary winding may be different to the wire used for the primary. (The term "gauge of wire" refers to its cross-sectional area.)
  3571. There will be some energy losses in a transformer, usually appearing as heat.
  3572. 
  3573. 130
  3574. Rectifiers
  3575. There are three basic rectifier configurations, half-wave, full-wave and bridge. We will look at each in turn. We will use semiconductor rectifiers only.
  3576. The half-wave rectifier
  3577. Here is a very basic power supply, a transformer feeding a resistor as its load with a rectifier inserted in the circuit.
  3578. Without the rectifier, the load would have the full secondary alternating voltage appearing across it.
  3579. The rectifier will conduct each time its anode is positive with respect to its cathode.
  3580. So when the end of the secondary winding shown + is positive, the diode acts as a short- circuit and the + appears across the load. Current flows around the secondary circuit for the time that the diode is conducting. The voltage drop across the diode can be regarded as negligible - about 0.6 volt for a silicon device.
  3581. The waveform appearing across the load is shown in red on the graph. One-half cycle of the AC from the transformer is conducted by the rectifier, one half cycle is stopped. This is pulsating DC - half-wave rectified AC. Later we will put this through a filter to "smooth" it.
  3582. The full-wave rectifier
  3583. This is two half-wave rectifiers combined - it uses a center-tapped secondary winding and one additional diode.
  3584. Each side of the centre-tap has the same number of turns as our previous example - and each "works" for half the cycle as our half-wave rectifier did.
  3585. The "top half" of the secondary works with one diode like the half-wave circuit we have just considered.
  3586. When the polarity of the secondary changes, the upper diode shuts off and the lower diode conducts.
  3587. The result is that the lower diode "fills in" another half-cycle in the waveform when the upper diode is not conducting.
  3588. 
  3589. Smoothing the output - the Filter
  3590. Each of the three circuits studied produces an output that is DC, but DC with a waveform showing a "ripple". The ripple is the waveform in red in the three examples. DC power supply should be smooth non-varying in amplitude.
  3591. The half-wave circuit produced a of the same frequency as the input 50 Hz for input from a mains supply.
  3592. The other two examples produced ripple that is twice the frequency of mains supply - i.e. 100 Hz.
  3593. How can we remove the ripple? By a filter circuit comprising filter capacitors and often a choke.
  3594. above it is large shown from a and
  3595. ripple signal,
  3596. a the
  3597. using
  3598. 131
  3599. The bridge rectifier
  3600. This uses one single winding as the secondary and four diodes - two are conducting at any one time.
  3601. Note the configuration of the diodes:
  3602. Diodes on parallel sides "point" in the same directions.
  3603. The AC signal is fed to the points where a cathode and anode join. The positive output is taken from the junction of two cathodes.
  3604. The other end of the load goes to the junction of two anodes.
  3605. The operation is simple: Parallel-side diodes conduct at the same time. Note that the two + points are connected by a diode - same as in the two previous cases. The other end of the load returns to the transformer via the other parallel diode. When the polarity changes, the other two diodes conduct.
  3606. The output waveform is the same as the full-wave rectifier example shown before.
  3607. The main advantage? A simpler transformer - no centre-tap and no extra winding. Diodes can be small and cheap. A bridge rectifier can be purchased as a "block" with four wire connections.
  3608. 
  3609. 132
  3610. A capacitor wired across the load will charge up when the diode conducts and will discharge after the diode has stopped conducting. This reduces the size of the ripple. The blue lines in this diagram illustrate this.
  3611. The choice of capacitor is important. Electrolytic capacitors are generally used because a very large value capacity can be obtained in a small and cheap package.
  3612. The capacitor value chosen depends on the purpose for the supply. Capacities of the order of thousands of microfarads are common for low-voltage supplies. For supplies of 100V and upwards, the capacity is more likely to be 50 microfarad or so. It depends on other factors too. The voltage rating of the capacitor and its wiring polarity must be observed (electrolytic capacitors have + and - connections).
  3613. When a diode conducts, it must supply current to the load as well as charge up the capacitor. So the peak current passing through the diode can be very high. The diode only conducts when its anode is more positive than its cathode. You can see from the diagram how the addition of the capacitor has shortened this time.
  3614. The switch-on current through a power supply diode must also be considered. Charging a large capacitor from complete discharge will mean a high initial current.
  3615. A choke and an additional capacitor are often used to filter the output from a rectifier, as shown in this diagram.
  3616. The choke is an iron-cored inductor made for the purpose and it must be able to carry a rated DC current without its core saturating.
  3617. Internal resistance
  3618. All power supplies exhibit "internal resistance". A torch light will dim as its battery ages. The internal resistance of its battery increases with age. On open circuit, without the bulb connected, i.e. with no load current being drawn, the battery may show its normal voltage reading. When the load is applied and current flows, the internal resistance becomes apparent and the output voltage "droops" or "sags".
  3619. The effects of internal resistance can be reduced substantially by using a "regulator". This added electronic circuitry "winds up the voltage" as the output load current increases to keep the output voltage constant. It keeps the voltage constant as the load current widely varies
  3620. 
  3621. 133
  3622. Choice of supply
  3623. A power supply (also a battery) must have sufficient reserve energy capacity to provide adequate energy to the device it is working with. For example, pen-light dry cells are not a substitute for a vehicle battery!
  3624. Similarly, a power supply for an amateur radio transceiver, (to substitute for a vehicle battery), must be chosen with care to ensure that the maximum load current can be supplied at the correct voltage rating without the voltage "sagging" when the load is applied.
  3625. Question File: 21. Power supplies: (1 question):
  3626. 1. A mains operated DC power supply:
  3627. a. converts DC from the mains into AC of the same voltage
  3628. b. converts energy from the mains into DC for operating electronic equipment
  3629. c. is a diode-capacitor device for measuring mains power
  3630. d. is a diode-choked device for measuring inductance power
  3631. ==================
  3632. 2. The following unit in a DC power supply performs a rectifying operation:
  3633. a. an electrolytic capacitor
  3634. b. a fuse
  3635. c. a crowbar
  3636. d. a full-wave diode bridge
  3637. ==================
  3638. 3. The following unit in a DC power supply performs a smoothing operation:
  3639. a. an electrolytic capacitor
  3640. b. a fuse
  3641. c. a crowbar
  3642. d. a full-wave diode bridge
  3643. ==================
  3644. 4. The following could power a solid-state 10 watt VHF transceiver:
  3645. a. a 12 volt car battery
  3646. b. 6 penlite cells in series
  3647. c. a 12 volt, 500 mA plug-pack
  3648. d. a 6 volt 10 Amp-hour Gel cell.
  3649. ==================
  3650. 5. A fullwave DC power supply operates from the New Zealand AC mains. The ripple
  3651. frequency is:
  3652. a. 25 Hz
  3653. b. 50 Hz
  3654. c. 70 Hz
  3655. d. 100 Hz
  3656. ==================
  3657. 134
  3658. 6. The capacitor value best suited for smoothing the output of a 12 volt 1 amp DC power supply is:
  3659. a. 100 pF
  3660. b. 10 nF
  3661. c. 100 nF
  3662. d. 10,000 uF
  3663. ==================
  3664. 7. The following should always be included as a standard protection device in any
  3665. power supply:
  3666. a. a saturating transformer
  3667. b. a fuse in the mains lead
  3668. c. a zener diode bridge limiter
  3669. d. a fuse in the filter capacitor negative lead
  3670. ==================
  3671. 8. A halfwave DC power supply operates from the New Zealand AC mains. The
  3672. ripple frequency will be:
  3673. a. 25 Hz
  3674. b. 50 Hz
  3675. c. 70 Hz
  3676. d. 100 Hz
  3677. ==================
  3678. 9. The output voltage of a DC power supply decreases when current is drawn from it
  3679. because:
  3680. a. drawing output current causes the input mains voltage to decrease
  3681. b. drawing output current causes the input mains frequency to decrease
  3682. c. all power supplies have some internal resistance
  3683. d. some power is reflected back into the mains.
  3684. ==================
  3685. 10. Electrolytic capacitors are used in power supplies because:
  3686. a. they are tuned to operate at 50 Hz
  3687. b. they have very low losses compared to other types
  3688. c. they radiate less RF noise than other types
  3689. d. they can be obtained in larger values than other types
  3690. ==================
  3691. 135
  3692. Section 22 Regulated Power Supplies
  3693. The need for voltage regulation
  3694. A voltage regulator is added to a power supply to minimise the "voltage droop" or "sag" when the load is applied and when the current load varies widely..
  3695. Some loads, for example a SSB transceiver, present a wide-changing current requirement. The power supply current for a SSB transceiver, supplied from a car battery, can fluctuate while the operator is speaking from a few amps to 50 amp or more, depending upon its transmitter power rating. The battery voltage must remain at a constant level throughout. Similarly, a mains-powered power supply must be able to keep a constant voltage throughout a wide current range.
  3696. A regulated power supply has another stage added to follow the filter:
  3697. A simple regulator
  3698. A zener diode is a silicon diode with a special level of doping to set its reverse break-down voltage level. It forms a simple regulator for low-voltage and small-current loads. The zener diode is reverse-biased and the reverse current is determined by the break-down voltage which depends on the doping level of the silicon. The breakdown voltage is repetitive provided the maximum power dissipation is not exceeded. There is a catalogue choice of zener diode across a wide
  3699. range of voltages. The zener effect occurs below 5 volt, above 5 volt the avalanche effect is used.
  3700. The resistor R is to limit the current through the diode and the load.
  3701. 
  3702. 136
  3703. The Three-Terminal Regulator
  3704. This is an example of a regulator package, a 78LO5. It looks like a standard transistor but it is a complete regulator for supplying a 5 volt output from (say) a 12 volt DC input. There are many other similar devices available for similar purposes. The pin-connection details are given. ("Three-legged regulators".)
  3705. The diode D1 is a hold-off diode, for protection against the possibility of the input connections being inadvertently reversed.
  3706. The diode will not conduct with reverse input potential so the regulator is protected. Diode D2 is protection for the device itself from a higher voltage appearing at its output compared to the input terminal.
  3707. The Series Pass Regulator
  3708. A power transistor can be used to control the output voltage from a supply.
  3709. A power transistor (or several in parallel) is in series with the output. The base is fed from a separately-regulated supply such as a three-terminal regulator or a zener diode. The transistor is in an emitter-follower configuration. Its emitter contains the load and the emitter follows the voltage at the base.
  3710. Protective measures
  3711. All the regulator circuits considered above require the input voltage to be considerably higher than the output. If the regulator fails, there is the distinct possibility that excessive
  3712. 
  3713. 137
  3714. voltage will be applied to the load. Over-voltage could damage the load and be very expensive if the load was a transceiver!
  3715. An electronic device known as a "crowbar" is usually installed to protect the load as a "last ditch" measure in the case of a regulator failure. The crowbar senses an over-voltage condition on the supply's output and acts instantly, firing a shorting device (usually a silicon-controlled-rectifier) across the supply output. This causes high currents in the supply which blows the mains fuse and effectively turns the supply off.
  3716. Current-limiting is another protective measure usually incorporated in a regulated
  3717. supply. This is to reduce the current through the regulator to a low value under excessive load or short-circuit conditions to protect the series pass transistor from excessive power dissipation and possible destruction.
  3718. Question File: 22. Regulated Power supplies: (1 question):
  3719. 1. The block marked 'Filter' in the diagram is to:
  3720. a. filter RF radiation from the output of the power supply
  3721. b. smooth the rectified waveform from the rectifier
  3722. c. act as a 50 Hz tuned circuit
  3723. d. restore voltage variations
  3724. ==================
  3725. 2. The block marked 'Regulator' in the diagram is to:
  3726. a. regulate the incoming mains voltage to a constant value
  3727. b. ensure that the output voltage never exceeds a dangerous value
  3728. c. keep the incoming frequency constant at 50 Hz
  3729. d. keep the output voltage at a constant value
  3730. ==================
  3731. 
  3732. 3. The block marked 'Transformer' in the diagram is to:
  3733. a. transform the incoming mains AC voltage to a DC voltage
  3734. b. ensure that any RF radiation cannot get into the power supply
  3735. c. transform the mains AC voltage to a more convenient AC voltage
  3736. d. transform the mains AC waveform into a higher frequency waveform
  3737. ==================
  3738. 4. The block marked 'Rectifier' in the diagram is to:
  3739. a. turn the AC voltage from the transformer into a fluctuating DC voltage
  3740. b. rectify any waveform errors introduced by the transformer
  3741. c. turn the sinewave output of the rectifier into a square wave
  3742. d. Smooth the DC waveform
  3743. ==================
  3744. 5. The block marked 'Regulator' in the diagram could consist of:
  3745. a. four silicon power diodes in a regulator configuration
  3746. b. two silicon power diodes and a centre-tapped transformer
  3747. c. a three-terminal regulator chip
  3748. d. a single silicon power diode connected as a half-wave rectifier
  3749. ==================
  3750. 6. In the block marked regulator below, a reverse diode may be present across the
  3751. regulator. Its job is to:
  3752. a. Block negative voltages from appearing at the output
  3753. b. Blow a fuse if high voltages occur at the output
  3754. c. Blow a fuse if negative currents occur at the output
  3755. d. Bypass the regulator for higher voltage at its output compared with its input
  3756. ==================
  3757. 138
  3758. 
  3759. 7. A power supply is to power a solid-state transceiver. A suitable over-voltage protection device is a:
  3760. a. crowbar across the regulator output
  3761. b. 100 uF capacitor across the transformer output
  3762. c. fuse in parallel with the regulator output
  3763. d. zener diode in series with the regulator
  3764. ==================
  3765. 8. In a regulated power supply, the 'crowbar' is a:
  3766. a. means to lever up the output voltage
  3767. b. circuit for testing mains fuses
  3768. c. last-ditch protection against failure of the regulator in the supply
  3769. d. convenient means to move such a heavy supply unit
  3770. ==================
  3771. 9. In a regulated power supply, 'current limiting' is sometimes used to:
  3772. a. prevent transformer core saturation
  3773. b. protect the mains fuse
  3774. c. minimise short-circuit current passing through the regulator
  3775. d. eliminate earth-leakage effects
  3776. ==================
  3777. 10. The purpose of a series pass transistor in a regulated power supply is to:
  3778. a. suppress voltage spikes across the transformer secondary winding
  3779. b. work as a surge multiplier to speed up regulation
  3780. c. amplify output voltage errors to assist regulation
  3781. d. Allow for higher current to be supplied than the regulator would otherwise allow
  3782. ==================
  3783. 139
  3784. 140
  3785. Section 23
  3786. General Operating Procedures
  3787. Note: This section includes:
  3788. Signal Reporting, QSL cards, the Phonetic Alphabet,
  3789. and
  3790. Morse code abbreviations.
  3791. You have passed the examination, been issued a licence, and have a callsign. You have acquired a transmitter and receiver. You are now set to begin operating.
  3792. Golden Rules of Operating
  3793. LISTEN: This is the first rule. The strongest reason for listening before transmitting is to ensure that you won't interfere with anyone already using the frequency. The second reason for listening is that it may tell you a great deal about the condition of the bands. Although a band may be dead by popular consent at a particular time, frequent openings occur which you can take advantage of if you are listening at the right time. The third reason for listening is that if you can't hear 'em you are not likely to work 'em. Several short calls with plenty of listening spells will net you more contacts than a single long call. If you are running low power you may find it more fruitful to reply to someone else's CQ rather than call CQ yourself.
  3794. KEEP IT SHORT: If we all listened and never called, the bands would be very quiet indeed. So, if after listening, you have not made a contact, call CQ. The rules for calling CQ are:
  3795. 1. Use your callsign frequently. Whoever you are calling knows their own callsign. They are interested in finding out yours.
  3796. 2. Keep it short. Either they have heard you or they haven't. Either way, it is a waste of time giving a long call. If they are having difficulty in hearing you, use phonetics, but keep the overs as short as possible.
  3797. 
  3798. 141
  3799. 3. Examples:
  3800. When using CW send a 3 by 3 CQ. This means the letters CQ sent three times, followed
  3801. by your callsign sent three times, and then the same group sent again, for example:
  3802. CQ CQ CQ de ZL1XYZ ZL1XYZ ZL1XYZ
  3803. sent twice and finally end with the letter K (for over) after the second group. It is a nice and polite touch to add the endpiece "pse" (please):
  3804. "CQ CQ CQ de ZL1XYZ ZL1XYZ ZL1XYZ PSE K".
  3805. For voice operation you should repeat your call phonetically, for example:
  3806. CQ CQ CQ from ZL1XYZ ZL1XYZ ZL1XYZ ZULU LIMA ONE X-RAY YANKEE ZULU maybe three times and finish with:
  3807. calling CQ and listening.
  3808. 4. Don't attempt to engage in DX "pileups" (many stations calling a rare callsign station) until you understand the accepted conventions for calling and replying.
  3809. A very bad practice may be observed in this activity. A station calling may carry out what amounts to an endurance exercise on the basis that the station who calls the longest gets the contact, purely because it is the only one that the DX station can hear clearly. This is unacceptable behaviour and should be avoided.
  3810. 5. When you have made contact with that rare DX station make sure that they have your call and town correctly, give her/him your honest report, log your contact details, and then let the next station have its turn. Rare DX stations are not usually interested in the state of the weather in Eketahuna.
  3811. DO UNTO OTHERS: This rule if faithfully applied, would make the crowded HF bands far more tolerable.
  3812. 1. Don't interfere with another station for any reason (except in extreme emergency).
  3813. 2. Don't use full power to tune your antenna to resonance or when making matching
  3814. adjustments with your antenna tuner. Always use a dummy load, or a noise bridge which enables you to tune your antenna accurately before transmitting.
  3815. 3. Keep your power down to the minimum required for good communication.
  3816. 4. Don't use excess audio drive or compression. This causes splatter and interference to
  3817. other stations.
  3818. 
  3819. 142
  3820. If there are other amateur operators in the area, it is courteous to make yourself known to them when you first begin transmitting. Check for things like cross modulation problems. If you are causing another amateur interference which is unrelated to equipment faults, you will have to come to a mutual arrangement about transmitting hours. The above suggestions apply to all modes of operation. Some modes have their own particular rules, and these will be discussed in detail separately.
  3821. Repeater Operation
  3822. Repeaters were set up to provide a wider coverage on VHF and UHF as well as to provide facilities for emergency communication. So there are special rules governing repeater operation.
  3823. 1. Keep contacts short. Three minutes is the generally accepted maximum length for an over using a repeater.
  3824. 2. Leave a pause between overs. This is to enable weak stations with emergency traffic to make contact. Three seconds is the accepted break.
  3825. 4. Don't tune up on a repeater's input frequency.
  3826. These are the main rules for using repeaters.
  3827. Other points to note when using repeaters or working simplex channels are:
  3828. 1. Long CQs are not necessary or desirable on VHF or UHF channels. Just report that you are monitoring the channel. If anyone is listening and wants to contact you they will respond to your brief call.
  3829. 2. When you want to contact someone through a repeater, it is not necessary to give a series of long calls. Either they are listening or they are not. A short call followed by: are you are about Bill and Ben? will usually bring forth a response. Some people respond to their name rather than to their callsign.
  3830. Do not keep triggering the repeater to make sure that it is there. This annoys the other people who monitor the repeater and it is not a good operating practice. A better way to announce your presence is to call and request a signal report from someone who may be monitoring the repeater. This may also result in an interesting and unexpected contact.
  3831. 143
  3832. CW - or Morse Code - operating
  3833. Although CW operating appears to be slow compared with the use of voice, widespread use of abbreviations enables a CW contact to be conducted quite quickly. The first point to master in CW operation is the meaning of the various abbreviations for words and phrases in common use. A list is given below.
  3834. Other expressions are also used. An expression such as "up 2" means that the operator will be listening 2 kHz higher up the band at the end of his call.
  3835. The international Q-Code is also used for common instructions and consists of three-letter groups, each of which has a well defined meaning. The Q code is used to ask a question when followed by a question mark, and also used to provide a reply. For instance, if you are asked QRS? it means that the operator you are contacting is asking, should I send more slowly. The reply could be QRS 12 or whatever speed is suitable to the receiving operator.
  3836. When used on voice transmissions, many of the Q code signals take on a slightly different meaning, for instance the letters QRP indicate, low power, and QRX means, standby.
  3837. Operating CW is slightly different from voice transmission in that it is essential for the beginner to write everything down. As you become more proficient you will be able to copy in your head, but this comes only with practice.
  3838. Have a good supply of writing material handy. It adds to your difficulties if, when having to copy an incoming signal, pencils are lost, or blunt, or the supply of paper has run out. In your early days of CW sending, it helps to have a sheet of card on which is printed the name of your town, your own name, and a few details of the weather and so on. It is amazing how easy it is to forget even the spelling of your own name in morse code when in the middle of a contact. Operating convenience is fairly easy to arrange and gives a conversational style to CW transmissions. It also enables you to hear any interference on the frequency, and you can then stop to find out if you are still being heard. When calling CQ pause frequently.
  3839. Voice operation
  3840. A lot of your operation on the bands will be by voice, whether in the SSB or FM modes. Here are a few do's and don'ts.
  3841. 1. Speak clearly into the microphone. It is a good idea to contact a local operator and ask for a critical report. Adjust your speaking distance from the microphone and audio gain control to obtain the best results. If you change your microphone or transceiver, repeat the process with the new equipment. It is often better to talk across the microphone instead of into it.
  3842. 
  3843. 144
  3844. 2. If conditions are difficult, use phonetics . A copy of the standard phonetic alphabet is below. This list is used and understood by all operators and will get through far better than any other phonetics you may invent.
  3845. 3. During overseas contacts the use of local slang and abbreviations should be avoided as the person you are contacting may have only sufficient English to provide the essential QSL information.
  3846. 4. The voice equivalent of break-in keying is VOX. This enables the transmitter to be automatically turned on with the first syllable of speech. Adjustments are provided on transceivers fitted with VOX which enable the audio gain, delay, and anti-vox, to be adjusted. These controls should be carefully set so that the transmitter is turned on as soon as speech commences, and that the delay is just sufficient to hold the transmitter on during the space between words, but released during a reasonable pause in the conversation. This will enable your contact to reply quickly to a comment, and permits an easy conversational flow.
  3847. Signal reporting
  3848. The RST system of signal reporting is based on a scale of 1 to 5 for readability, and 1 to 9 for signal strength. A tone figure of 1 to 9 is also given in the case of CW reports - for the purity of tone.
  3849. The RST System:
  3850. READABILITY
  3851. 1 - Unreadable
  3852. 2 - Barely readable, occasional words distinguishable 3 - Readable with considerable difficulty
  3853. 4 - Readable with practically no difficulty
  3854. 5 - Perfectly readable
  3855. SIGNAL STRENGTH
  3856. 1 - Faint signals, barely perceptible 2 - Very weak signals
  3857. 3 - Weak Signals
  3858. 4 - Fair signals
  3859. 5 - Fairly good signals
  3860. 6 - Good signals
  3861. 7 - Moderately strong signals 8 - Strong signals
  3862. 9 - Extremely strong signals
  3863. 
  3864. 145
  3865. TONE
  3866. 1 - AC hum, very rough and broad
  3867. 2 - Very rough ac, very harsh and broad
  3868. 3 - Rough ac tone, rectified but not filtered
  3869. 4 - Rough note, some trace of filtering
  3870. 5 - Filtered rectified ac but strong ripple modulated
  3871. 6 - Filtered tone, definite trace of ripple modulation
  3872. 7 - Near pure tone, trace of ripple modulation
  3873. 8 - near perfect tone, slight trace of modulation
  3874. 9 - Perfect tone, no trace of ripple or modulation of any kind
  3875. The R readability part of the report is usually easy to resolve with a fair degree of honesty, although you will sometimes hear a report of readability 5, and "could you please repeat your name and location"!
  3876. The biggest problem in reporting seems to be the accuracy of the S signal strength reports.
  3877. Some receivers are fitted with an "S" meter. The indication is usually related to the receiver's AGC level. AGC The meter may be a moving-coil or an LED bargraph. The usual scale is for an increase of +6 dB in the receiver input signal for each "S" point up to S9, with a +20 dB indication then up to +60 dB. In practice, on the HF bands, an S meter needle makes wide changes and at best is just a simple indicator of variations in the propagation path . Its best use may be for comparing two incoming signals, such as when your contact station changes antennas.
  3878. Variations in equipment, propagation, the type of antenna and power of the equipment used by the operator at the other end, can all influence a signal strength report. With these variables the best you can do is to be consistent in the signal strength reports you give and hope that your contact does the same. This applies particularly to DX contacts. However, if your local contacts begin to give you reports that are at variance with what you normally receive, it's time to have a good look at your antenna and equipment, as something may have become disconnected or out of adjustment.
  3879. The T part of the RST reporting system refers to the tone of the received signal and is used in CW reporting. On a scale of 1 to 9, a 1 would indicate a heavy AC hum. A 9, indicates a clean tone, as from a sine wave audio oscillator. It is unusual to hear a signal that is not T9 these days. The numbers in between give variations of the above conditions. Again, honesty of reporting. If a signal is not up to standard tell the operator. He will appreciate it. If your signal is not up to scratch, fix it. You owe this to other users of the bands.
  3880. When using FM these signal reports become meaningless. The audio level of an FM signal will not change with an increase in signal strength — the background noise will drop as the signal strength increases. This is called "quieting". A typical report could be "strength 5,
  3881. 
  3882. 146
  3883. very little noise". Signal reports from a repeater are generally meaningless, but a report to a user that he is fully limiting the repeater, or that his signal is breaking badly will sometimes help someone who may be checking a new site, or trying to access a repeater that he has not been able to work into before.
  3884. Other modes
  3885. The original digital means of communication was the Morse code and this is still in use as a method of transferring information by means other than voice. Today however Morse has been joined by a number of other methods each with its own advantages and disadvantages. RTTY, AMTOR, and Packet Radio, have all been given a great boost with the arrival of the computer and the advent of satellites with store and forward facilities. It is now possible to pass information to many parts of the world with a hand held transceiver, modem, and computer. Each of these means of communication has its own particular operating protocol and a study of it is well worthwhile before you venture into digital communications. DIGIT AL
  3886. Confirming the contact - QSL cards Q-Code
  3887. Most amateurs follow up a contact with an exchange of QSL cards to confirm the contact. When you design one for yourself, remember that these cards are sometimes used to obtain awards and certificates and if used for this purpose must contain the following information:
  3888. 1. Your callsign, the callsign of the station worked, and your address. This should appear on the same side as other QSL information.
  3889. 2. The date and time of the contact. The date should have the name of the month written. For example, 5 March 1990. In the United States 5/3/90 means May 3rd 1990. Times should be expressed in Universal Time. If local time is used this should be stated. Remember that when using Universal Time, the date changes at midday in New Zealand. (1 p.m. during daylight saving time.)
  3890. 3 Signal Report.
  3891. 4. Frequency of operation.
  3892. 5. Mode of operation. Some awards require the mode used by both stations to be stated.
  3893. For example, 2-way SSB.
  3894. 6. If the card is to be sent through the NZART QSL Bureau, the call of the station to whom the card is to be sent should be printed on the back of the card. If a QSL manager is used by the recipient, that is the call that should be used.
  3895. 7. Other information which may be included is a description of equipment, NZART Branch number, County, and Maidenhead Locator.
  3896. 
  3897. 147
  3898. The New Zealand Association of Radio Transmitters, NZART, operates a QSL bureau. Cards may be forwarded through this if you are a member. Details of the bureau are in the Annual NZART CallBook. If you send a card direct, it is a courtesy to send a self- addressed envelope and international reply coupons to cover the cost of return postage.
  3899. Frequency Bands and
  3900. Metres
  3901. Amateur Radio frequency bands are often referred to in terms of wavelength. This Table relates the frequency bands to the wavelength equivalent:
  3902. Table of Frequency Bands and Metres equivalent:
  3903. 148
  3904. Frequency Band
  3905. Metre Band
  3906. 165-190 kHz
  3907. 1750 metres
  3908. 1800-1950 kHz
  3909. 160 metres
  3910. 3.50-3.90 MHz
  3911. 80 metres
  3912. 7.00-7.30 MHz
  3913. 40 metres
  3914. 10.10-10.15 MHz
  3915. 30 metres
  3916. 14.00-14.350 MHz
  3917. 20 metres
  3918. 18.068-18.168 MHz
  3919. 17 metres
  3920. 21.00-21.45MHz
  3921. 15 metres
  3922. 24.89-24.99 MHz
  3923. 12 metres
  3924. 27.12 MHz
  3925. 11 metres
  3926. 28.00-29.70 MHz
  3927. 10 metres
  3928. 50.00-54.00 MHz
  3929. 6 metres
  3930. 144.0-148.0 MHz
  3931. 2 metres
  3932. 430-440 MHz
  3933. 70 centimetres
  3934. The Phonetic Alphabet:
  3935. This is an extract from the International Radio Regulations:
  3936. APPENDIX S14 Phonetic Alphabet
  3937. When it is necessary to spell out call signs, service abbreviations and words, the following letter spelling table shall be used:
  3938. Letter to be transmitted
  3939. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U
  3940. V W X Y Z
  3941. Code word to be used
  3942. Alfa
  3943. Bravo Charlie
  3944. Delta Echo Foxtrot Golf
  3945. Hotel India Juliett
  3946. Kilo
  3947. Lima
  3948. Mike November Oscar Papa Quebec Romeo Sierra
  3949. T ango Uniform
  3950. Victor Whiskey X-ray Yankee Zulu
  3951. Spoken as*
  3952. AL FAH
  3953. BRAH VOH
  3954. CHAR LEE or SHAR LEE DELL TAH
  3955. ECK OH
  3956. FOKS TROT
  3957. GOLF
  3958. HOH TELL
  3959. IN DEE AH
  3960. JEW LEE ETT
  3961. KEY LOH
  3962. LEE MAH
  3963. MIKE
  3964. NO VEM BER
  3965. OSS CAH
  3966. PAH PAH
  3967. KEH BECK
  3968. ROW ME OH
  3969. SEE AIR RAH
  3970. TANG GO
  3971. YOU NEE FORM or OO NEE FORM VIK TAH
  3972. WISS KEY
  3973. ECKS RAY YANG KEY ZOO LOO
  3974. 149
  3975. 
  3976. The following are general phonetics used by radio amateurs:
  3977. Figure or mark to be transmitted
  3978. 0
  3979. 1
  3980. 2
  3981. 3
  3982. 4
  3983. 5
  3984. 6
  3985. 7
  3986. 8
  3987. 9 Decimal point Full stop
  3988. Code word to be used
  3989. zero one two three four five six seven eight nine Decimal
  3990. Stop
  3991. Spoken as*
  3992. ZAY-ROH WUN TOO THREE FOWER FIVE
  3993. SIX SEVEN AIT NINE DAY-SEE-MAL
  3994. STOP
  3995. 150
  3996. AA AB ABT AGN ANT BCI BCNU CK CL CPI CQ CUD CUL DE DX ES FB
  3997. all after all before
  3998. about again
  3999. antenna
  4000. broadcast interference
  4001. be seeing you check
  4002. closing down copy
  4003. calling all stations could
  4004. see you later
  4005. this is; from
  4006. distant foreign countries and
  4007. fine; excellent
  4008. Morse code abbreviations
  4009. GB GE GM GN GUD HI
  4010. HI HI HR HW NR NW OC OM OP OT PSE PWR RX RFI RIG RPT SRI TNX TKS TVI UR VY WKD TX XT AL XYL YL 73 88
  4011. goodbye good evening
  4012. good morning good night
  4013. good high
  4014. the CW laugh here
  4015. how is
  4016. near; number
  4017. now
  4018. old chap
  4019. old man operator old timer
  4020. please power receiver
  4021. radio frequency interference equipment
  4022. repeat sorry
  4023. thanks
  4024. thanks
  4025. television interference
  4026. your very
  4027. worked transmitter
  4028. crystal wife
  4029. young lady best regards love and kisses
  4030. Question File: 23. General Operating Procedures: (1 question)
  4031. 1. The correct order for callsigns in a callsign exchange at the start and end of a transmission is:
  4032. a. the other callsign followed by your own callsign
  4033. b. your callsign followed by the other callsign
  4034. c. your own callsign, repeated twice
  4035. d. the other callsign, repeated twice
  4036. ==================
  4037. 151
  4038. 152
  4039. 2. The following phonetic code is correct for the callsign "ZL1AN":
  4040. a. zanzibar london one america norway
  4041. b. zulu lima one alpha november
  4042. c. zulu lima one able nancy
  4043. d. zulu lima one able niner
  4044. ==================
  4045. 3. The accepted way to call "CQ" with a SSB transceiver is:
  4046. a. "CQ CQ CQ this is ZL1XXX ZL1XXX ZL1XXX"
  4047. b. "This is ZL1XXX calling CQ CQ CQ"
  4048. c. "CQ to anyone, CQ to anyone, I am ZL1XXX"
  4049. d. "CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ this is New Zealand"
  4050. ==================
  4051. 4. A signal report of "5 and 1" indicates:
  4052. a. very low intelligibility but good signal strength
  4053. b. perfect intelligibility but very low signal strength
  4054. c. perfect intelligibility, high signal strength
  4055. d. medium intelligibilty and signal strength
  4056. ==================
  4057. 5. The correct phonetic code for the callsign VK5ZX is:
  4058. a. victor kilowatt five zulu xray
  4059. b. victor kilo five zulu xray
  4060. c. victor kilo five zanzibar xray
  4061. d. victoria kilo five zulu xray
  4062. ==================
  4063. 6. The accepted way to announce that you are listening to a VHF repeater is:
  4064. a. "hello 6695, this is ZL2ZZZ listening"
  4065. b. "calling 6695, 6695, 6695 from ZL2ZZZ"
  4066. c. "6695 from ZL2ZZZ"
  4067. d. "ZL2ZZZ listening on 6695"
  4068. ==================
  4069. 7. A rare DX station calling CQ on CW and repeating "up 2" at the end of the call
  4070. means the station:
  4071. a. will be listening for replies 2 kHz higher in frequency
  4072. b. will reply only to stations sending at greater than 20 wpm
  4073. c. is about to shift his calling frequency 2 kHz higher
  4074. d. will wait more than 2 seconds before replying to his call
  4075. ==================
  4076. 8. When conversing via a VHF or UHF repeater you should pause between overs for
  4077. about:
  4078. a. half a second
  4079. b. 3 seconds
  4080. c. 30 seconds
  4081. d. several minutes
  4082. ==================
  4083. 9. Before calling CQ on the HF bands, you should:
  4084. a. listen first, then ask if the frequency is in use
  4085. b. request that other operators clear the frequency
  4086. c. request a signal report from any station listening
  4087. d. use a frequency where many stations are already calling
  4088. ==================
  4089. 10. The phrase "you are fully quieting the repeater" means:
  4090. a. your signal is too weak for the repeater to reproduce correctly
  4091. b. your signal into the repeater is strong enough to be noise-free on the output
  4092. frequency
  4093. c. your modulation level is too low
  4094. d. you are speaking too quietly into the microphone.
  4095. ==================
  4096. 153
  4097. 154
  4098. Section 24
  4099. Operating Procedures and Practice
  4100. Receiver facilities
  4101. RF and IF gain controls - Simple receivers for the broadcast band have one "gain control" only, this sets the level of audio gain. Communications receivers have other gain controls which work on stages in advance of the detector.
  4102. An RF gain control sets the gain ahead of the receiver mixer. Adjustment to the gain of the first stage in the receiver can assist reception in cases where front-end-overload may be bothersome. This occurs when trying to receive a weak signal adjacent in frequency to a very strong local signal.
  4103. An IF gain control gives an independent control over the amplification prior to the detector stage. Most of the amplification in a receiver takes place in the IF stages. There may be many IF stages and operator-gain-control can effect improved performance.
  4104. AGC - "Automatic Gain Control". Tuning a receiver from a weak signal to a very strong signal (and back again) calls for frequent adjustment to the receiver's gain control(s). This becomes tiresome and is a nuisance with a communications receiver when tuning across a band of frequencies.
  4105. HF signals fade and the received audio can change from loud to faint and back again at sometimes very fast intervals. This need to frequently adjust a gain control is also a nuisance and burdensome.
  4106. By sampling the strength of the signal being received (by rectifying it to produce a voltage) and by applying it to some of the amplifier stages, it is possible to automatically adjust the overall gain of a receiver. Tuning from a strong signal to a weak one, and the fading of a distant signal, will now have minimal effect on the level of audio heard from the speaker.
  4107. The signal-level sample for AGC applications may be taken from the detector or alternatively may be a rectified sample of the received audio. The AGC voltage is usually a DC voltage fed back to the IF amplifier stages where it controls the bias of the amplifiers,
  4108. "S" meter - This is usually a meter front-panel-mounted on a receiver and calibrated in signal strength units and dB. It varies as the signal fades. It is usually an electronic voltmeter measuring the AGC voltage.
  4109. 
  4110. 155
  4111. With a strong signal, the AGC level will be high. With a weak signal, there may be no AGC voltage at all.
  4112. As a absolute level measurement, an S-meter is generally unsatisfactory. It is useful for making relative measurements between different received signals. Read it with caution!
  4113. Noise blanker - Noise at HF is often of the "impulse variety", short sharp spikes of noise that blank out reception. A noise blanker uses such spikes to form a gating signal in the path of the signal through the receiver. A noise spike then automatically mutes the receiver for the period of the noise spike. This makes reception more comfortable on the ears of the operator. The effectiveness of a noise blanker varies and depends on the type of noise and the signal levels being received.
  4114. Station switching
  4115. PTT - "Push-To-Talk". The simple way to control the send/receive function on a transceiver is to use a "pressel" switch on the microphone. Pushing the switch is a simple and intuitive action when sending a voice transmission. Release the switch and the transceiver reverts to receiving incoming signals. The switch usually operates a relay inside the transceiver. The relay does all the switching changes needed to change from receive to send and back again.
  4116. VOX - "Voice-Operated-Relay" or "Voice-Operated-Transmit" This technique can be used to simulate duplex operation (i.e. telephone-type conversations) when operating phone on the HF bands. It is an extension of PTT operating. Just speak! A sample of the speech audio from the microphone is amplified and rectified to provide a DC control signal. That DC signal operates the relay which does the station send/receive switching.
  4117. A VOX system must have a "fast attack, slow release" characteristic to be sure that the first syllable of a spoken statement is not severely clipped, and to ensure that the relay does not clatter excessively in and out between the spoken words.
  4118. Break-in keying - This system uses the Morse key as the send/receive switch too. When using the key, on first key-down, the station changes to transmit. Stop using the key - and the station receives. The "channel" in use can be monitored during key-up periods when sending. Conversational-type contacts are possible.
  4119. 156
  4120. Operating techniques
  4121. RIT - "Receiver Incremental Tuning". A transceiver is usually a receiver and transmitter combination sharing a lot of common circuits - such as the various oscillators that determine its operating frequency. RIT provides a tuning facility so the receiver can be separately tuned for a few kHz each side of the transmit frequency, hence giving independent control over the receive frequency.
  4122. Split Frequency Operating - A transceiver is usually a receiver and transmitter combination which shares a lot of common circuits - such as the various oscillators that determine its operating frequency. There are occasions when separation of the send and receive frequencies is desirable - to receive on one frequency but to transmit on another. An obvious example is when a Novice grade operator is receiving a station outside the Novice segment of the band but transmits inside the Novice segment.
  4123. Pileup - Loose colloquial jargon used by radio amateurs to indicate the congestion that can occur when many stations suddenly call and try to work the same station, usually a station in some "rare DX" location. Discipline is needed to minimise this problem.
  4124. Station optimising
  4125. ALC - "Automatic Level Control". Just as we had AGC in a receiver, this is a similar thing for transmitters, usually for the linear amplifiers used in SSB transmitters. Its purpose is to prevent over-driving the linear amplifier stages especially the final amplifier.
  4126. It may also permit the peaks of an SSB signal to be limited in amplitude to enable an increase in the mean output power of the transmitter to improve the relative signal level at a distant receiver. This function can also involve processing the audio in the transmitter, known as "compression" .
  4127. SWR bridge - Operating adjustments should be made to the Antenna Tuner for minimum reflected power indication on the SWR bridge. Appropriate antenna and transmission line adjustments should be made during installation for the same purpose.
  4128. VHF repeater working
  4129. A VHF (or UHF) repeater is a receiver and a transmitter connected together and sited on a hill-top or other high point - to get extended coverage.
  4130. 157
  4131. In this diagram , the repeate r receiver (Rx) audio output is passed to the transmit ter (Tx).
  4132. The Rx and Tx can share a common antenna. The receive and transmit signals are directed to the
  4133. appropriate places by the "duplexer" . This is a collection of high-Q tuned circuits, a passive device acting as filters for the repeater input and output signals.
  4134. The "control" detects a received carrier and switches the transmitter on - until the received carrier disappears when it then switches the transmitter off. So the push-to-talk switch in the mobile station also turns the repeater transmitter on and off for "talk-through" operating. The repeater receiver "squelch" is used to provide the transmitter send/receive function.
  4135. The frequency difference in this example is 600 kHz between the repeater receive and transmit frequencies. This is the standard "split" for repeaters operating in the 146 to 148 MHz band: i.e. it is plus 600 kHz above 147 MHz, and minus 600 kHz on or below 147 MHz. (The NZART CallBook gives details of the bandplans adopted in New Zealand and lists the frequencies and locations of amateur radio repeaters )
  4136. UHF repeaters operating in the 430 to 440 MHz band use a 5 MHz "split".
  4137. The carrier-operated switch at the repeater receiver may fail to operate when an input signal gets weak. When mobile stations are operating through the repeater, if a mobile moves into an area with little-or-no signal, the repeater may "drop out", there being insufficient signal to hold the repeater receiver open.
  4138. The carrier-operated switch at the repeater receiver is similar to the "squelch" operation in an FM receiver. FM receivers are very noisy in the absence of an input signal. To make life comfortable for operators monitoring FM communications channels, a "squelch" mutes the receiver loudspeaker in the absence of an incoming signal. The squelch "opens" when a signal is received and the signal's audio is then heard from the speaker.
  4139. 158
  4140. Repeater networks
  4141. New Zealand radio amateurs have built and installed 2-metre band (144 - 148 MHz) repeaters to provide most of the country with local area coverage.
  4142. The "National System" on the 70 cm band (430 to 440 MHz) is a chain of linked repeaters. These provide communication along the length of the country. Refer to the NZART CallBook for maps and other details about the operation of the National System.
  4143. Question File: 24. Practical Operating Knowledge: (2 questions)
  4144. 1. You are mobile and talking through a VHF repeater. The other station reports that you keep "dropping out". This means:
  4145. a. your signal is drifting lower in frequency
  4146. b. your signal does not have enough strength to operate the repeater
  4147. c. your voice is too low-pitched to be understood
  4148. d. you are not speaking loudly enough
  4149. ================== 2. A "pileup" is:
  4150. a. an old, worn-out radio
  4151. b. another name for a junkbox
  4152. c. a large group of stations all calling the same DX station
  4153. d. a type of selenium rectifier
  4154. ==================
  4155. 3. "Break-in keying" means:
  4156. a. unauthorised entry has resulted in station equipment disappearing
  4157. b. temporary emergency operating
  4158. c. key-down changes the station to transmit, key-up to receive
  4159. d. the other station's keying is erratic
  4160. ==================
  4161. 4. A repeater operating with a "positive 600 kHz split":
  4162. a. listens on a frequency 600 kHz higher than its designated frequency
  4163. b. transmits on a frequency 600 kHz higher than its designated frequency
  4164. c. transmits simultaneously on its designated frequency and one 600 kHz higher
  4165. d. uses positive modulation with a bandwidth of 600 kHz
  4166. ==================
  4167. 5. The standard frequency offset (split) for 2 metre repeaters in New Zealand is:
  4168. a. plus 600 kHz above 147 MHz, minus 600 kHz on or below 147 MHz
  4169. b. plus 600 kHz below 147 MHz, minus 600 kHz on or above 147 MHz
  4170. c. minus 5 MHz below 147 MHz, plus 5 MHz kHz on or above 147 MHz
  4171. d. plus 5 MHz below 147 MHz, minus 5 MHz kHz on or above 147 MHz
  4172. ==================
  4173. 159
  4174. 6. The standard frequency offset (split) for 70 cm repeaters in New Zealand is plus or minus:
  4175. a. 600 kHz
  4176. b. 1 MHz
  4177. c. 2 MHZ
  4178. d. 5 MHz
  4179. ==================
  4180. 7. You are adjusting an antenna matching unit using an SWR bridge. You should
  4181. adjust for:
  4182. a. maximum reflected power
  4183. b. equal reflected and transmitted power
  4184. c. minimum reflected power
  4185. d. minimum transmitted power
  4186. ==================
  4187. 8. The "squelch" or "muting" circuitry on a VHF receiver:
  4188. a. inhibits the audio output unless a station is being received
  4189. b. compresses incoming voice signals to make them more intelligible
  4190. c. reduces audio burst noise due to lightning emissions
  4191. d. reduces the noise on incoming signals
  4192. ==================
  4193. 9. The "S meter" on a receiver:
  4194. a. indicates where the squelch control should be set
  4195. b. indicates the standing wave ratio
  4196. c. indicates the state of the battery voltage
  4197. d. indicates relative incoming signal strengths
  4198. ==================
  4199. 10. The "National System" is:
  4200. a. the legal licensing standard of Amateur operation in New Zealand
  4201. b. a series of nationwide amateur radio linked repeaters in the 70 cm band
  4202. c. the official New Zealand repeater band plan
  4203. d. A nationwide emergency communications procedure
  4204. ==================
  4205. 11. A noise blanker on a receiver is most effective to reduce:
  4206. a. 50 Hz power supply hum
  4207. b. noise originating from the mixer stage of the receiver
  4208. c. ignition noise
  4209. d. noise originating from the RF stage of the receiver.
  4210. ==================
  4211. 12. The purpose of a VOX unit in a transceiver is to:
  4212. a. change from receiving to transmitting using the sound of the operator's voice
  4213. b. check the transmitting frequency using the voice operated crystal
  4214. c. enable a volume operated extension speaker for remote listening
  4215. d. enable the variable oscillator crystal
  4216. ==================
  4217. 160
  4218. 13. "VOX" stands for:
  4219. a. volume operated extension speaker
  4220. b. voice operated transmit
  4221. c. variable oscillator transmitter
  4222. d. voice operated expander
  4223. ==================
  4224. 14. "RIT" stands for:
  4225. a. receiver interference transmuter
  4226. b. range independent transmission
  4227. c. receiver incremental tuning
  4228. d. random interference tester
  4229. ==================
  4230. 15. The "RIT" control on a transceiver:
  4231. a. reduces interference on the transmission
  4232. b. changes the frequency of the transmitter section without affecting the frequency of
  4233. the receiver section
  4234. c. changes the transmitting and receiver frequencies by the same amount
  4235. d. changes the frequency of the receiver section without affecting the frequency of
  4236. the transmitter section
  4237. ==================
  4238. 16. The "split frequency" function on a transceiver allows the operator to:
  4239. a. transmit on one frequency and receive on another
  4240. b. monitor two frequencies simultaneously using a single loudspeaker
  4241. c. monitor two frequencies simultaneously using two loudspeakers
  4242. d. receive CW and SSB signals simultaneously on the same frequency
  4243. ==================
  4244. 17. The term "ALC" stands for:
  4245. a. audio limiter control
  4246. b. automatic level control
  4247. c. automatic loudness control
  4248. d. automatic listening control
  4249. ==================
  4250. 18. The AGC circuit is to:
  4251. a. expand the audio gain
  4252. b. limit the extent of amplitude generation
  4253. c. minimise the adjustments needed to the receiver gain control knobs
  4254. d. amplitude limit the crystal oscillator output
  4255. ==================
  4256. 19. Many receivers have both RF and AF gain controls. These allow the operator to:
  4257. a. vary the receiver frequency and AM transmitter frequency independently
  4258. b. vary the low and high frequency audio gain independently
  4259. c. vary the receiver's "real" and "absolute" frequencies independently
  4260. d. vary the gain of the radio frequency and audio frequency amplifier stages
  4261. independently
  4262. ==================
  4263. 20. The term "PTT" means:
  4264. a. push to talk
  4265. b. piezo-electric transducer transmitter
  4266. c. phase testing terminal
  4267. d. phased transmission transponder
  4268. ==================
  4269. 161
  4270. QUESTION FILE 25 (1 question) Q CODES
  4271. These abbreviated three letter “Q” Codes were evolved by old-time telegraphy operators as a shorthand means for exchanging information about working conditions being experienced over the circuit in use.
  4272. You will be tested on only 10 of the 40 or so Q Code messages that are used in amateur radio communication.
  4273. Many can be used as a query if followed by a question mark, e. g. QRM? QTH? or as an answer to a query or as a statement of fact with no question mark, e.g. QTH Auckland, QTH San Francisco etc.
  4274. All Q codes may be used while operating CW and some are used during phone transmissions. QRL?Means“Areyoubusy” [25.6]Commonlymeans“isthefrequencyinuse?” QRM Means “Your transmission is being interfered with” [25.1]
  4275. QRN Means “I am troubled by static” [25.2]
  4276. QRP? Means “Shall I decrease transmitter power?” [25.7] Without the query means “I am running low power”
  4277. QRQ Means “Please send faster” [25.10] QRS Means “Please send slower” [25.3]
  4278. With a query could mean “shall I (or we) send slower?”
  4279. QRZ? Means “Who is calling me?” [25.4]
  4280. Commonly means “who is on this frequency?” if you were unable to copy a callsign
  4281. QSB As part of a signal report means “your signals are fading” [25.8] QSY? Means “Shall I change to transmission on another frequency?” [25.9]
  4282. Without the query means “I am going to change frequency/up 5 (kHZ)/ to 28.459 etc.”
  4283. QTH? Means “What is your location?” [25.5]
  4284. Without the query “QTH Melbourne” means “my location is Melbourne”
  4285. You will need to memorize these Q Codes before the course starts
  4286. 162
  4287. 
  4288. Hints
  4289. Often QRM and QRN are confused QRM is Man made interference QRN is Natural Noise
  4290. QRQ for Quicker QRS for Slower
  4291. Question File: 25. Q signals: (1 question)
  4292. 1. The signal "QRM" means:
  4293. a. your signals are fading
  4294. b. I am troubled by static
  4295. c. your transmission is being interfered with
  4296. d. is my transmission being interfered with?
  4297. ==================
  4298. 2. The signal "QRN" means:
  4299. a. I am busy
  4300. b. I am troubled by static
  4301. c. are you troubled by static?
  4302. d. I am being interfered with
  4303. ==================
  4304. 3. The "Q signal" requesting the other station to send slower is:
  4305. a. QRL
  4306. b. QRN
  4307. c. QRM
  4308. d. QRS
  4309. ==================
  4310. 4. The question "Who is calling me?" is asked by:
  4311. a. QRT?
  4312. b. QRM?
  4313. c. QRP?
  4314. d. QRZ?
  4315. ==================
  4316. 5. The "Q" signal "what is your location?" is:
  4317. a. QTH?
  4318. b. QTC?
  4319. c. QRL?
  4320. d. QRZ?
  4321. ==================
  4322. 163
  4323. 
  4324. 6. The "Q" signal "are you busy?" is:
  4325. a. QRM?
  4326. b. QRL?
  4327. c. QRT?
  4328. d. QRZ?
  4329. ==================
  4330. 7. The "Q" signal "shall I decrease transmitter power?" is:
  4331. a. QRP?
  4332. b. QRZ?
  4333. c. QRN?
  4334. d. QRL?
  4335. ==================
  4336. 8. The "Q" signal "your signals are fading" is:
  4337. a. QSO
  4338. b. QSB
  4339. c. QSL
  4340. d. QRX
  4341. ==================
  4342. 9. The signal "QSY?" means:
  4343. a. shall I change to transmission on another frequency?
  4344. b. shall I increase transmitter power?
  4345. c. shall I relay to .... ?
  4346. d. is my signal fading?
  4347. ==================
  4348. 10. The "Q" signal which means "send faster" is:
  4349. a. QRP
  4350. b. QRQ
  4351. c. QRS
  4352. d. QRN
  4353. 164
  4354. 165
  4355. Section 26 Transmission Lines
  4356. Carrying the signal
  4357. Transmission lines are the link between your station equipment, transmitter, receiver, transceiver, and the antenna. There are many different varieties but two major types of line predominate for frequencies in general use by radio amateurs.
  4358. Parallel-conductor line, also known as twin-line, or open-wire line, consists of two parallel conductors held apart at a constant fixed distance by insulators or by insulation. This type of transmission line is "balanced". This means that each wire is "hot" with respect to earth. Coaxial cable (coax) is the other major type and consists of two concentric conductors. It is a single wire surrounded by insulation and enclosed in an outer conductor, usually a braid. This is an "unbalanced" line, the outer sheath can be at earth potential, only the inner wire is "hot".
  4359. The transmitter power radiating from the antenna is less than that generated at the transmitter due to losses in the transmission line. These losses increase with higher SWR values, with higher frequencies and with increasing the length of the line. Most line loss occurs in the supporting insulation so open-wire lines have lower losses than heavily- insulated line.
  4360. Parallel lines
  4361. These come in various types. The flat TV "300-ohm ribbon" is an example. "Ladder-line", in which two parallel conductors are spaced by insulation "spreaders" at intervals is another. These lines are relatively cheap. Open-wire lines can be home-constructed using improvised "spreaders". These lines have low losses at HF frequencies.
  4362. These lines do have the disadvantage that they must be kept away from other conductors and earthed objects. They cannot be buried or strapped directly to a tower.
  4363. As the frequency increases, the open-wire line spacing becomes a significant fraction of the wavelength and the line will radiate some energy.
  4364. Because it is a balanced line, it can feed a dipole directly without the use of a "balun" at the antenna. (Baluns are discussed below.) Most transceivers have an unbalanced 50-ohm output impedance and a balun transformer will be required to feed a balanced line.
  4365. Parallel lines vary in impedance depending on the diameter and the spacing of the conductors. TV twin lead has an impedance of 300-ohm and ladder-line is usually 450 or 600-ohm.
  4366. 
  4367. 166
  4368. Coaxial cable
  4369. Coaxial cable consists of two concentric conductors with dielectric insulation in the space between the conductors. The inner conductor carries the signal (i.e. it is "hot") the outer conductor is usually at earth potential and acts as a shield. This cable can be buried and run close to metal objects with no harmful effects.
  4370. Coax comes in various sizes from very small to large diameters. The small sizes are for low powers and short distances. The larger sizes have higher power-handling capabilities and usually lower losses. Most amateurs use 50-ohm cable while TV coax is usually 75- ohm.
  4371. The dielectric insulator is generally the main cause of energy loss. Most coax uses solid polyethylene and some types use a foam version. The foam version is lower loss but the solid version is more rugged. For very low loss purposes, a solid outer is used ("hardline"), and the inner conductor is supported by a spiral insulator or by beads. This type of coax is hard to work, cannot be bent very sharply and is generally expensive.
  4372. Impedance
  4373. An important characteristic of a transmission line is its "impedance". This can range from about 30 ohm for high-power coax to 600 to 1000 ohm for open-wire wide-spaced line. The unit of measurement is the ohm, but you cannot simply attach an ohm-meter to coax cable to measure its impedance.
  4374. The characteristic impedance of a line is not dependent on its length but on the physical arrangement of the size and spacing of the conductors. (Remember that when simply put, impedance is the ratio of the voltage to the current. A high voltage and low current means a high impedance. A low voltage and high current means low impedance).
  4375. Loads attached to the distant end of a line have an effect on the impedance "seen" at the input to the line.
  4376. When a line is terminated at the distant end with a termination impedance that is the same as the characteristic impedance of the line, the input to the line will be "seen" to be the characteristic impedance of that line. In other words, looking in to the input of this line, you "see" an infinitely-long line. This is ideal for the optimum transfer of power from the transmitter down the line to the antenna.
  4377. 
  4378. 167
  4379. In this diagram, the termination is the same value as the characteristic impedance of the line. The voltage across the line is shown as E for the various points along the line and the current in the line at those same points is shown as I.
  4380. Note that the line is "flat" - there is no variation in the ratio of voltage to current (i.e. no variation in impedance) at any point along the line.
  4381. If there was such a thing as an infinitely long line, cutting a short length off it and terminating that short piece with a load equal to its characteristic impedance, would still make it indistinguishable at its input from an infinitely long line - as shown in the diagram above.
  4382. Line terminations
  4383. There are several classic cases of line termination which must be known and each will be described in turn.
  4384. For a line with a short-circuit termination, consider this approach:
  4385. A signal starts off and travels down the line. It reaches the distant end and finds the line to be short-circuited! What can it do? It turns around and travels back to the source. So there are now TWO waves travelling on the line but in different directions - the forward wave being still sent down the line, and the reflected wave, on its way back.
  4386. At any point on the line, the voltage across the line will be the sum of these two component waves, measured using an appropriate voltmeter.
  4387. But the voltage across the line at a short-circuit must be zero. So the reflected wave must be phased in such a way that the resultant voltage at the short-circuit is zero. See the red E curve above. Coming back down the line the voltage will increase as shown in the diagram above.
  4388. Likewise, at a short-circuit the current will be high. So the current in the line must be high at the termination and will decrease as you measure it back down the line. The current will follow the blue I curve shown above.
  4389. 
  4390. 168
  4391. Impedance is the ratio of voltage to current. So at the load (a short-circuit) the impedance will be zero. As you travel back down the line, both E and I vary so the ratio between them is varying. When the line is one-quarter wavelength long, the impedance will be very high - approaching infinity.
  4392. A similar thing happens when the line is open-circuited:
  4393. In this case, there will be a high voltage at the end of the line - the open-circuit. The current in the line must be zero there. So the impedance will be very high. Travelling back down the line, the impedance (the ratio of voltage to current) will decrease until at a quarter- wavelength point, the impedance will be seen to be zero.
  4394. The quarter-wave length of line in effect inverts the impedance at its termination. Quarter- wave lengths of line are very useful for many applications especially at VHF and UHF.
  4395. The half-wave length of line can be considered as two quarter-wavelengths in cascade and its performance can be deduced from that approach.
  4396. 
  4397. 169
  4398. The input impedance of a half-wave length of line is a repeat of the termination at the distant end.
  4399. The Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR)
  4400. We have considered the line with a matched load, with a short-circuit termination and with an open-circuit termination. The practical values of load fall somewhere between these limits.
  4401. The VSWR (usually shortened to SWR) can be visualised by considering the forward and reflected waves in a line. If the antenna (the termination at the load end of the line) does not exactly match the line (i.e. is not exactly equal to the characteristic impedance of the line), then some energy will be reflected back down the line. So we have a forward wave (high energy) and a reflected wave (smaller than the forward wave) on the line. A pattern of peaks and troughs in the voltage measured between the line conductors will be found as you measure the voltage at points back down the line.
  4402. The SWR can be measured with a device known variously as a "reflectometer" or SWR bridge, or plain SWR meter.
  4403. The SWR meter is usually placed near to the transmitter. It distinguishes between the forward and reflected waves in the line. It gives an indication of whether the antenna is matched to the line by allowing the standing-wave-ratio to be measured. When inserted in the line between the transmitter and the antenna tuning unit, it also permits the antenna tuning unit to be adjusted.
  4404. Any variations from a "correct match" at the antenna (or load) end of the line can have a significant effect on the power radiated by the system:
  4405. 1. The transmitter requires a "correct match" (usually 50-ohm) to the line for the best transfer of energy from the transmitter to the line.
  4406. 
  4407. 170
  4408. 2. The line requires a minimum SWR for least losses, and
  4409. 3. the match from the line to the antenna should be correct to minimise the SWR on
  4410. the line.
  4411. Variations from a "correct match" can also have undesirable effects on a transmitter to the point of causing overheating in the final stage and arcing in tuned circuits.
  4412. The "Antenna Tuner"
  4413. This is usually inserted in the transmission line adjacent to the transmitter with the transmission line to the antenna following and the antenna connected at the distant end of the line. The antenna tuner does not really tune the antenna at all. It does not adjust the length of the antenna elements, alter the height above ground, and so on. What it does do is to transform the impedance at the feedline input to a value that the transmitter can handle - usually 50 ohm. Think of the antenna tuner as an adjustable impedance transformer and you will understand its function.
  4414. If the antenna is cut to resonance and is designed to match the impedance of the transmitter and feedline, an antenna tuner is not required. The transmitter is presented with a 50-ohm load (or something close to it) and into which it can deliver its full output power. The "SWR bandwidth" is important. The SWR bandwidth of many antenna designs is usually limited to only some 200 or 300 kHz. If a dipole is cut to resonate with a 1:1 SWR at 7 MHz, you may find that the SWR is above 2.5:1 at 7200 kHz. Most modern transceivers will begin to reduce output or may automatically completely shut down at SWR's above
  4415. 2:1.
  4416. With an antenna tuner in the same line, you can transform the impedance seen by the transmitter to 50-ohm, and reduce the SWR in the short piece of line between the transmitter and the antenna tuner to 1:1 again. The transceiver then delivers its full output again. The radiated power will be slightly reduced because of the higher losses on the line between the tuner and the antenna, attenuation due to the higher line currents associated with the higher SWR on that stretch of line.
  4417. This attenuation is caused by the fact that the matching function of the tuner has not changed the conditions on the line between the tuner and the antenna.
  4418. Velocity factor
  4419. A radio wave in free space travels with the speed of light. When a wave travels on a transmission line, it travels slower, travelling through a dielectric/insulation. The speed at which it travels on a line compared to the free-space velocity is known as the "velocity factor".
  4420. Typical figures are:
  4421. Twin line 0.82, Coaxial cable 0.66, (free space 1.0).
  4422. So a wave in a coaxial cable travels at about 66% of the speed of light (as an example). In practice this means that if you have to cut a length of coaxial transmission line to be a half-wavelength long (for, say, some antenna application), the length of line you cut off will have to be 0.66 of the free-space length that you calculated.
  4423. Baluns
  4424. A balun is a device to convert a balanced line to an unbalanced line - and vice-versa. It comes in a variety of types.
  4425. 171
  4426. The "transformer" type is probably the easiest version to understand. Consider a transformer with two windings, a primary and a secondary. The primary can be fed by a coaxial cable - the UNbalanced input. The secondary could be a centre-tapped winding with the tap connected to the outer of the coaxial input cable. The two ends of the secondary are then the BALanced connections. Impedance transformation can also be made by adjusting the number of turns on the primary and secondary windings.
  4427. When a balanced antenna, such as a dipole, is directly fed with coax (and unbalanced line), the antenna currents (which are inherently balanced) will run on the outside of the coax to balance the coaxial cable currents which are inherently unbalanced. This feedline current leads to radiation from the feedline itself as well as by the antenna and can distort the antenna radiation pattern. The RF can travel back down the outside of the coax to the station and cause metal surfaces at the station to become live to RF voltages. RF shocks are unpleasant and burn the flesh. They should be avoided. To correct this, a balun should be used when connecting a balanced line to an unbalanced line and vice-versa.
  4428. Baluns are used for connecting TV receivers (75-ohm unbalanced) to 300-ohm ribbon (balanced).
  4429. Using a single antenna for transmit and receive
  4430. A lot of trouble and expense goes into erecting a good feeder and antenna system for transmitting. It should also be used for receiving. This is usually the case with a transceiver.
  4431. With a station comprising a separate transmitter and receiver, a change-over relay can be fitted to switch the antenna feeder between the two items. It is usual - and desirable - for the unit not being used to be disabled. Extra poles on this same relay can be used to disable the device not being used.
  4432. Question File: 26. Transmission lines: (2 questions)
  4433. 1. Any length of transmission line may be made to appear as an infinitely long line by:
  4434. a. shorting the line at the end
  4435. b. leaving the line open at the end
  4436. c. terminating the line in its characteristic impedance
  4437. d. increasing the standing wave ratio above unity
  4438. ==================
  4439. 2. The characteristic impedance of a transmission line is determined by the:
  4440. a. length of the line
  4441. b. load placed on the line
  4442. c. physical dimensions and relative positions of the conductors
  4443. d. frequency at which the line is operated
  4444. ==================
  4445. 172
  4446. 3. The characteristic impedance of a 20 metre length of transmission line is 52 ohm. If 10 metres is cut off, the impedance will be:
  4447. a. 13 ohm
  4448. b. 26 ohm
  4449. c. 39 ohm
  4450. d. 52 ohm
  4451. ==================
  4452. 4. The following feeder is the best match to the base of a quarter wave ground plane
  4453. antenna:
  4454. a. 300 ohm balanced feedline
  4455. b. 50 ohm coaxial cable
  4456. c. 75 ohm balanced feedline
  4457. d. 300 ohm coaxial cable
  4458. ==================
  4459. 5. The designed output impedance of the antenna socket of most modern
  4460. transmitters is nominally:
  4461. a. 25 ohm
  4462. b. 50 ohm
  4463. c. 75 ohm
  4464. d. 100 ohm
  4465. ==================
  4466. 6. To obtain efficient transfer of power from a transmitter to an antenna, it is
  4467. important that there is a:
  4468. a. high load impedance
  4469. b. low load impedance
  4470. c. correct impedance match between transmitter and antenna
  4471. d. high standing wave ratio
  4472. ==================
  4473. 7. A coaxial feedline is constructed from:
  4474. a. a single conductor
  4475. b. two parallel conductors separated by spacers
  4476. c. braid and insulation around a central conductor
  4477. d. braid and insulation twisted together
  4478. ==================
  4479. 8. An RF transmission line should be matched at the transmitter end to:
  4480. a. prevent frequency drift
  4481. b. overcome fading of the transmitted signal
  4482. c. ensure that the radiated signal has the intended polarisation
  4483. d. transfer maximum power to the antenna
  4484. ==================
  4485. 9. A damaged antenna or feedline attached to the output of a transmitter will present
  4486. an incorrect load resulting in:
  4487. a. the driver stage not delivering power to the final
  4488. b. the output tuned circuit breaking down
  4489. c. excessive heat being produced in the transmitter output stage
  4490. d. loss of modulation in the transmitted signal
  4491. ==================
  4492. 173
  4493. 10. A result of mismatch between the power amplifier of a transmitter and the antenna is:
  4494. a. reduced antenna radiation
  4495. b. radiation of key clicks
  4496. c. lower modulation percentage
  4497. d. smaller DC current drain
  4498. ==================
  4499. 11. Losses occurring on a transmission line between a transmitter and antenna result
  4500. in:
  4501. a. less RF power being radiated
  4502. b. aSWRof1:1
  4503. c. reflections occurring in the line
  4504. d. improved transfer of RF energy to the antenna
  4505. ==================
  4506. 12. If the characteristic impedance of a feedline does not match the antenna input
  4507. impedance then:
  4508. a. standing waves are produced in the feedline
  4509. b. heat is produced at the junction
  4510. c. the SWR drops to 1:1
  4511. d. the antenna will not radiate any signal
  4512. ==================
  4513. 13. A result of standing waves on a non-resonant transmission line is:
  4514. a. maximum transfer of energy to the antenna from the transmitter
  4515. b. perfect impedance match between transmitter and feedline
  4516. c. reduced transfer of RF energy to the antenna
  4517. d. lack of radiation from the transmission line
  4518. ==================
  4519. 14. A quarter-wave length of 50-ohm coaxial line is shorted at one end. The
  4520. impedance seen at the other end of the line is:
  4521. a. zero
  4522. b. 5 ohm
  4523. c. 150 ohm
  4524. d. infinite
  4525. ==================
  4526. 15. A switching system to use a single antenna for a separate transmitter and receiver
  4527. should also:
  4528. a. disable the unit not being used
  4529. b. disconnect the antenna tuner
  4530. c. ground the antenna on receive
  4531. d. switch between power supplies
  4532. ==================
  4533. 16. An instrument to check whether RF power in the transmission line is transferred to
  4534. the antenna is:
  4535. a. a standing wave ratio meter
  4536. b. an antenna tuner
  4537. c. a dummy load
  4538. d. a keying monitor
  4539. ==================
  4540. 174
  4541. 17. This type of transmission line will exhibit the lowest loss:
  4542. a. twisted flex
  4543. b. coaxial cable
  4544. c. open-wire feeder
  4545. d. mains cable
  4546. ==================
  4547. 18. The velocity factor of a coaxial cable with solid polythene dielectric is about:
  4548. a. 0.66
  4549. b. 0.1
  4550. c. 0.8
  4551. d. 1.0
  4552. ==================
  4553. 19. This commonly available antenna feedline can be buried directly in the ground for
  4554. some distance without adverse effects:
  4555. a. 75 ohm twinlead
  4556. b. 300 ohm twinlead
  4557. c. 600 ohm open-wire
  4558. d. coaxial cable
  4559. ==================
  4560. 20. If an antenna feedline must pass near grounded metal objects, the following type
  4561. should be used:
  4562. a. 75 ohm twinlead
  4563. b. 300 ohm twinlead
  4564. c. 600 ohm open-wire
  4565. d. coaxial cable
  4566. ==================
  4567. 175
  4568. Section 27 Antennas
  4569. Wavelength and frequency
  4570. A useful and fundamental measurement in radio antenna work is the "half wavelength". We must know how to calculate it. It gives the desired physical length of an antenna for any operating frequency.
  4571. Wavelength, frequency, and the speed of light, are related. The length of a radio wave for a given frequency when multiplied by that operating frequency, gives the speed of light.
  4572. Knowing that the speed of light is c = 3 x 108 metres per second, and knowing our operating frequency, we can derive the wavelength of a radio wave by transposition as follows:
  4573. Wavelength (in metres) = 300 divided by the frequency in MHz. .
  4574. A simple way to remember this is to remember 10 metres and 30 MHz, (to get the value of
  4575. the constant, 300 !).
  4576. That gives a wavelength! The half-wavelength of a wave is half of the wavelength figure you obtain!
  4577. So a half-wavelength at 10 metres (30 MHz) will be 5 metres. The amateur 10 metre band is 28 to 29.7 MHz so a half-wavelength for that band will be a little longer than 5 metres. Pick a frequency and calculate it!
  4578. 
  4579. 176
  4580. Dipoles
  4581. The fundamental antenna is the dipole. It is an antenna in two parts or poles.
  4582. It is usually a one-half wavelength in overall length and is fed at the middle with a balanced feedline. One side of the antenna is connected to one side of the line and the other to the remaining side either directly or through some sort of phasing line.
  4583. When making a half-wave dipole for HF frequencies, one usually has to reduce the length by about 2 percent to account for capacitive effects at the ends. This is best done after installation because various factors such as the height above ground and other nearby conducting surfaces can affect it.
  4584. The feedpoint impedance of a half-wave dipole, installed about one wavelength or higher above ground (i.e. in "free space"), is 72 ohm. When the ends are lowered (i.e. into an "inverted V"), the impedance drops to around 50 ohms.
  4585. The ends of the antenna should be insulated as they are high-voltage low-current points. The connections of the feedline to the antenna should be soldered because the centre of the dipole is a high-current low-voltage point.
  4586. The radiation pattern of a dipole in free space has a minimum of radiation in the direction off the ends of the dipole and a maximum in directions perpendicular to it. This pattern degrades considerably when the dipole is brought closer to the ground.
  4587. 
  4588. 177
  4589. A modified version of the simple dipole is the folded dipole. It has two half-wave conductors joined at the ends and one conductor is split at the half-way point where the feeder is attached.
  4590. If the conductor diameters are the same, the feedpoint impedance of the folded dipole will be four times that of a standard dipole, i.e. 300 ohm.
  4591. The height above the ground
  4592. The height of an antenna above the ground, and the nature of the ground itself, has a considerable effect on the performance of an antenna.and its angle of radiation. See PROPAGATION
  4593. The physical size of a dipole
  4594. A wire dipole antenna for the lower amateur bands is sometimes too long to fit into a smaller property. The antenna can be physically shortened and it can still act as an electrical half-wave antenna by putting loading coils in each leg as shown in this diagram. With careful design, performance in still acceptable.
  4595. Installing such "loading coils" lowers the resonant frequency of an antenna.
  4596. Multi-band dipoles
  4597. A simple half-wave dipole cut to length for operation on the 40m band (7 MHz) will also operate on the 15m band without any changes being necessary. This is because the physical length of the antenna appears to be one-and-one-half wavelengths long at 15 metres (21 MHz), i.e. three half-wavelengths long.
  4598. A dipole antenna can be arranged to operate on several bands using other methods. One way is to install "traps" in each leg.
  4599. These are parallel-tuned circuits as shown in this diagram (enlarged to show the circuitry). The traps are seen as "high impedances" by the highest band in use and the distance between the traps is a half-wavelength for that band. At the frequencies of lower bands, the traps are seen as inductive and the antenna appears as a dipole with loading coils in each leg. With clever and careful design, operation becomes possible on a range of amateur bands.
  4600. 
  4601. 178
  4602. Baluns
  4603. Dipoles should be fed with a "balanced line".
  4604. Vertical antennas
  4605. The simplest vertical is the Marconi which is a quarter-wave radiator above a ground-plane. It has a feedpoint impedance over a perfect ground of 36 ohm. Above real ground it is usually between 50 and 75 ohm. This makes a good match for 50 ohm cable with the shield going to ground. For a given wavelength it is the smallest antenna with reasonable efficiency and so is a popular choice for mobile communication. It can be thought of half of
  4606. a dipole with the other half appearing as a virtual image in the ground.
  4607. A longer antenna can produce even lower radiation angles although these antennas become a bit large to easily construct. A length often used for VHF mobile operation is the 5/8th wavelength. This length has a higher feed impedance and requires a matching network to match most feeder cables. Vertical antennas require a good highly conductive ground. If the natural ground conductivity is poor, quarter-wave copper wire radials can be laid out from the base of the vertical to form a virtual ground.
  4608. Vertical antennas provide an omni-directional pattern in the horizontal plane so they receive and transmit equally well in all directions. This also makes them susceptible to noise and unwanted signals from all directions.
  4609. Vertical antennas are often used by DX operators because they produce low angle radiation that is best for long distances.
  4610. Beams
  4611. To improve signal transmission or reception in specific directions, basic elements, either vertical or horizontal, can be combined to form arrays. The most common form is the Yagi- Uda parasitic array commonly referred to as a Yagi array or beam.
  4612. It consists of a driven element which is either a simple or folded dipole and a series of parasitic elements arranged in a plane. The elements are called parasitic because they are not directly driven by the transmitter but rather absorb energy from the radiated element and re-radiate it.
  4613. Usually a Yagi will have one element behind the driven element (called the reflector), and one or more elements in front (called the directors). The reflector will be slightly longer than the driven element and the directors will be slightly shorter. The energy is then concentrated in a forward direction.
  4614. To rotate the beam, the elements are attached to a boom and in turn to a mast through some sort of rotator system.
  4615. Other antenna types can be constructed to give directivity. The size and weight, with wind resistance, are important. The cubical quad is a light-weight antenna for home-
  4616. 
  4617. 179
  4618. construction and it can provide good performance. It consists of two or more "square" wire cage-like elements.
  4619. Antenna measurements
  4620. Most antenna performance measurements are given in decibels. Important figures for a beam antenna are the forward gain, front-to-side ratio, and front-to-back ratio.
  4621. Forward gain is often given related to a simple dipole. For example, if the forward gain is said to be 10 dB over a dipole, then the radiated energy would be 10 times stronger in its maximum direction than a simple dipole.
  4622. Another comparison standard is the isotropic radiator or antenna. Consider it to be a theoretical point-source of radio energy. This is a hypothetical antenna that will radiate equally well in all directions in all planes - unlike a real vertical antenna which radiates equally well only in the horizontal plane. A dipole has a 2.3 dB gain over the isotropic radiator.
  4623. A front-to-back ratio of 20 dB means that the energy off the back of the beam is one- hundredth that of the front. Similar figures apply to the front-to-side ratio.
  4624. Another antenna measurement is the bandwidth or range of frequencies over which the antenna will satisfactorily operate. High gain antennas usually have a narrower bandwidth than low gain antennas. Some antennas may only cover a narrow part of a band they are used in while others can operate on several bands. Other antennas may be able to operate on several bands but not on frequencies in-between those bands.
  4625. Dummy loads
  4626. A dummy load, or dummy antenna, is not really an antenna but is closely related to one. It is a pure resistance which is put in place of an antenna to use when testing a transmitter without radiating a signal.
  4627. Commonly referred to as a termination, if correctly matched to the impedance of the line, when placed at the end of a transmission line it will make the transmission line look like an infinite line.
  4628. Most transmitters are 50 ohm output impedance so a dummy load is simply a 50 ohm non- inductive resistor load. The resistor can be enclosed in oil to improve its power-handing capacity. The rating for full-power operation may be for only a short time so be aware of the time and power ratings of your dummy load before testing for long periods at full power. The things can get very hot!
  4629. 180
  4630. Question File: 27. Antennas: (4 questions)
  4631. 1. In this diagram the item U corresponds to the:
  4632. a. boom
  4633. b. reflector
  4634. c. driven element
  4635. d. director
  4636. ==================
  4637. 2. In this diagram the item V corresponds to the:
  4638. a. boom
  4639. b. reflector
  4640. c. driven element
  4641. d. director
  4642. ==================
  4643. 3. In this diagram the item X corresponds to the:
  4644. a. boom
  4645. b. reflector
  4646. c. director
  4647. d. driven element
  4648. ==================
  4649. 4. The antenna in this diagram has two equal lengths of wire shown as 'X' forming a
  4650. dipole between insulators. The optimum operating frequency will be when the:
  4651. a. length X+X equals the signal wavelength
  4652. b. dimensions are changed with one leg doubled in length
  4653. c. length X+X is a little shorter than one-half of the signal wavelength
  4654. d. antenna has one end grounded
  4655. ==================
  4656. 
  4657. 181
  4658. 5. The antenna in this diagram can be made to operate on several bands if the following item is installed at the points shown at 'X' in each wire:
  4659. a. a capacitor
  4660. b. an inductor
  4661. c. a fuse
  4662. d. a parallel-tuned trap
  4663. ==================
  4664. 6. The physical length of the antenna shown in this diagram can be shortened and the electrical length maintained, if one of the following items is added at the points shown at 'X' in each wire:
  4665. a. an inductor
  4666. b. a capacitor
  4667. c. an insulator
  4668. d. a resistor
  4669. ==================
  4670. 7. The approximate physical length of a half-wave antenna for a frequency of 1000
  4671. kHz is:
  4672. a. 300 metres
  4673. b. 600 metres
  4674. c. 150 metres
  4675. d. 30 metres
  4676. ==================
  4677. 8. The wavelength for a frequency of 25 MHz is:
  4678. a. 15 metres
  4679. b. 32 metres
  4680. c. 4 metres
  4681. d. 12 metres
  4682. ==================
  4683. 9. Magnetic and electric fields about an antenna are:
  4684. a. parallel to each other
  4685. b. determined by the type of antenna used
  4686. c. perpendicular to each other
  4687. d. variable with the time of day
  4688. ==================
  4689. 
  4690. 10. Radio wave polarisation is defined by the orientation of the radiated:
  4691. a. magnetic field
  4692. b. electric field
  4693. c. inductive field
  4694. d. capacitive field
  4695. ==================
  4696. 11. A half wave dipole antenna is normally fed at the point of:
  4697. a. maximum voltage
  4698. b. maximum current
  4699. c. maximum resistance
  4700. d. resonance
  4701. ==================
  4702. 12. An important factor to consider when high angle radiation is desired from a
  4703. horizontal half-wave antenna is the:
  4704. a. size of the antenna wire
  4705. b. time of the year
  4706. c. height of the antenna
  4707. d. mode of propagation
  4708. ==================
  4709. 13. An antenna which transmits equally well in all compass directions is a:
  4710. a. dipole with a reflector only
  4711. b. quarterwave grounded vertical
  4712. c. dipole with director only
  4713. d. half-wave horizontal dipole
  4714. ==================
  4715. 14. A groundplane antenna emits a:
  4716. a. horizontally polarised wave
  4717. b. elliptically polarised wave
  4718. c. axially polarised wave
  4719. d. vertically polarised wave
  4720. ==================
  4721. 15. The impedance at the feed point of a folded dipole antenna is approximately:
  4722. a. 300 ohm
  4723. b. 150 ohm
  4724. c. 200 ohm
  4725. d. 100 ohm
  4726. ==================
  4727. 16. The centre impedance of a 'half-wave' dipole in 'free space' is approximately:
  4728. a. 52 ohm
  4729. b. 73 ohm
  4730. c. 100 ohm
  4731. d. 150 ohm
  4732. ==================
  4733. 182
  4734. 183
  4735. 17. The effect of adding a series inductance to an antenna is to:
  4736. a. increase the resonant frequency
  4737. b. have no change on the resonant frequency
  4738. c. have little effect
  4739. d. decrease the resonant frequency
  4740. ==================
  4741. 18. The purpose of a balun in a transmitting antenna system is to:
  4742. a. balance harmonic radiation
  4743. b. reduce unbalanced standing waves
  4744. c. protect the antenna system from lightning strikes
  4745. d. match unbalanced and balanced transmission lines
  4746. ==================
  4747. 19. A dummy antenna:
  4748. a. attenuates a signal generator to a desirable level
  4749. b. provides more selectivity when a transmitter is being tuned
  4750. c. matches an AF generator to the receiver
  4751. d. duplicates the characteristics of an antenna without radiating signals
  4752. ==================
  4753. 20. A half-wave antenna resonant at 7100 kHz is approximately this long:
  4754. a. 20 metres
  4755. b. 40 metres
  4756. c. 80 metres
  4757. d. 160 metres
  4758. ==================
  4759. 21. An antenna with 20 metres of wire each side of a centre insulator will be resonant
  4760. at approximately:
  4761. a. 3600 kHz
  4762. b. 3900 kHz
  4763. c. 7050 kHz
  4764. d. 7200 kHz
  4765. ==================
  4766. 22. A half wave antenna cut for 7 MHz can be used on this band without change:
  4767. a. 10 metre
  4768. b. 15 metre
  4769. c. 20 metre
  4770. d. 80 metre
  4771. ==================
  4772. 23. This property of an antenna broadly defines the range of frequencies to which it
  4773. will be effective:
  4774. a. bandwidth
  4775. b. front-to-back ratio
  4776. c. impedance
  4777. d. polarisation
  4778. ==================
  4779. 24. The resonant frequency of an antenna may be increased by:
  4780. a. shortening the radiating element
  4781. b. lengthening the radiating element
  4782. c. increasing the height of the radiating element
  4783. d. lowering the radiating element
  4784. ==================
  4785. 25. Insulators are used at the end of suspended antenna wires to:
  4786. a. increase the effective antenna length
  4787. b. limit the electrical length of the antenna
  4788. c. make the antenna look more attractive
  4789. d. prevent any loss of radio waves by the antenna
  4790. ==================
  4791. 26. To lower the resonant frequency of an antenna, the operator should:
  4792. a. lengthen the antenna
  4793. b. centre feed the antenna with TV ribbon
  4794. c. shorten the antenna
  4795. d. ground one end
  4796. ==================
  4797. 27. A half-wave antenna is often called a:
  4798. a. bi-polar
  4799. b. Yagi
  4800. c. dipole
  4801. d. beam
  4802. ==================
  4803. 28. The resonant frequency of a dipole antenna is mainly determined by:
  4804. a. its height above the ground
  4805. b. its length
  4806. c. the output power of the transmitter used
  4807. d. the length of the transmission line
  4808. ==================
  4809. 29. A transmitting antenna for 28 MHz for mounting on the roof of a car could be a:
  4810. a. vertical long wire
  4811. b. quarter wave vertical
  4812. c. horizontal dipole
  4813. d. full wave centre fed horizontal
  4814. ==================
  4815. 30. A vertical antenna which uses a flat conductive surface at its base is the:
  4816. a. vertical dipole
  4817. b. quarter wave ground plane
  4818. c. rhombic
  4819. d. long wire
  4820. ==================
  4821. 184
  4822. 31. The main characteristic of a vertical antenna is that it:
  4823. a. requires few insulators
  4824. b. is very sensitive to signals coming from horizontal aerials
  4825. c. receives signals from all points around it equally well
  4826. d. is easy to feed with TV ribbon feeder
  4827. ==================
  4828. 32. At the ends of a half-wave dipole the:
  4829. a. voltage and current are both high
  4830. b. voltage is high and current is low
  4831. c. voltage and current are both low
  4832. d. voltage low and current is high
  4833. ==================
  4834. 33. An antenna type commonly used on HF is the:
  4835. a. parabolic dish
  4836. b. cubical quad
  4837. c. 13-element Yagi
  4838. d. helical Yagi
  4839. ==================
  4840. 34. A Yagi antenna is said to have a power gain over a dipole antenna for the same
  4841. frequency band because:
  4842. a. it radiates more power than a dipole
  4843. b. more powerful transmitters can use it
  4844. c. it concentrates the radiation in one direction
  4845. d. it can be used for more than one band
  4846. ==================
  4847. 35. The maximum radiation from a three element Yagi antenna is:
  4848. a. in the direction of the reflector end of the boom
  4849. b. in the direction of the director end of the boom
  4850. c. at right angles to the boom
  4851. d. parallel to the line of the coaxial feeder
  4852. ==================
  4853. 36. The reflector and director(s) in a Yagi antenna are called:
  4854. a. oscillators
  4855. b. tuning stubs
  4856. c. parasitic elements
  4857. d. matching units
  4858. ==================
  4859. 37. An isotropic antenna is a:
  4860. a. half wave reference dipole
  4861. b. infinitely long piece of wire
  4862. c. dummy load
  4863. d. hypothetical point source
  4864. ==================
  4865. 185
  4866. 186
  4867. 38. The main reason why many VHF base and mobile antennas in amateur use are 5/8 of a wavelength long is that:
  4868. a. it is easy to match the antenna to the transmitter
  4869. b. it is a convenient length on VHF
  4870. c. the angle of radiation is high giving excellent local coverage
  4871. d. most of the energy is radiated at a low angle
  4872. ==================
  4873. 39. A more important consideration when selecting an antenna for working stations at
  4874. great distances is:
  4875. a. sunspot activity
  4876. b. angle of radiation
  4877. c. impedance
  4878. d. bandwidth
  4879. ==================
  4880. 40. On VHF and UHF bands, polarisation of the receiving antenna is important in relation to the transmitting antenna, but on HF it is relatively unimportant because:
  4881. a. the ionosphere can change the polarisation of the signal from moment to moment
  4882. b. the ground wave and the sky wave continually shift the polarisation
  4883. c. anomalies in the earth's magnetic field profoundly affect HF polarisation
  4884. d. improved selectivity in HF receivers makes changes in polarisation redundant
  4885. ==================
  4886. 187
  4887. Section 28 Propagation
  4888. The spectrum
  4889. Amateur Radio is all about the transmission of radio waves from place-to-place without wires. Signals travel from the transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna in different ways depending on the frequency used. Some frequencies use the ionosphere to bounce signals around the world while other frequencies can only be used for line-of-sight operations.
  4890. Radio waves are part of the spectrum of electromagnetic radiation, with infrared, light, ultraviolet, x-rays and cosmic rays at the extreme upper frequencies. Radio waves further subdivide into different frequency ranges. All electromagnetic radiation travels at the same speed, commonly referred to as the speed of light, c = 3 x 108 metres per second or 300 000 km per second.
  4891. Electromagnetic radiation consists of two waves travelling together, the magnetic and the electric, with the planes of the two waves perpendicular to each other.
  4892. The polarisation of a radio wave is determined by the direction of the electric field. Most antennas radiate waves that are polarised in the direction of the length of the metal radiating element. For example, the metal whips as used on cars are vertically polarised while TV antennas may be positioned for either vertical or horizontal polarisation. Polarisation is important on VHF and higher but is not very important for HF communications because the many reflections that a skywave undergoes makes its polarisation quite random.
  4893. The path
  4894. The simplest path to understand is the direct path in a straight line between transmitter and receiver. These are most important for communication on frequencies above 50 MHz. The signal might be reflected off buildings and mountains to fill in some shadows, but usually communication is just line-of-sight.
  4895. On lower frequencies the ionosphere is able to reflect the radio waves. The actual direction-change in the ionosphere is closer to refraction but reflection is easier to envisage.
  4896. For simplicity, we will use the reflection word here, but remember that the mechanism is more truly refractive. Similarly, again for simplicity, we will consider the regions where the change-of-direction takes place to be "layers" although they are more strictly "regions".
  4897. The signal reflected off the ionosphere is referred to as the skywave or ionospheric wave. The groundwave is the signal that travels on the surface of the earth and depends upon the surface conductivity.
  4898. 188
  4899. Groundwaves are the main mode of transmission on the MF bands (e.g. AM broadcast band), but they are not very important for amateur use - except perhaps on the only amateur MF band, 160 metres, 1.8 MHz. The groundwave is usually attenuated within 100 km.
  4900. On VHF and higher frequencies, variations in the atmospheric density can bend the radio waves back down to the earth. This is referred to as the tropospheric wave.
  4901. The skywave
  4902. The skywave is the primary mode of long distance communication by radio amateurs and is usually of the most interest. A skywave will go farther if it can take longer "hops". For this reason, a low angle (< 30°) radiation is best for DX (long distance) communication as it will travel farther before reflecting back to earth. Antennas that produce low angle radiation include verticals or dipoles mounted high (at least half a wavelength) above the ground.
  4903. The sun and the ionosphere
  4904. The ionosphere refers to the upper region of the atmosphere where charged gas molecules have been produced by the energy of the sun. The degree of ionisation varies with the intensity of the solar radiation. Various cycles affect the amount of solar radiation with the obvious ones being the daily and yearly cycles. This means that ionisation will be greatest around noon in the summer and at minimum just before dawn in the winter.
  4905. The output from the sun varies over a longer period of approximately 11 years. During the maximum of the solar sunspot cycle, there is greater solar activity and hence greater ionisation of the ionosphere.
  4906. Greater solar activity generally results in better conditions for radio propagation by increasing ionisation. However, very intense activity in the form of geomagnetic storms triggered by a solar flare can completely disrupt the layer of the ionosphere and block communications. This can happen in minutes and communications can take hours to recover.
  4907. Ionospheric layers
  4908. The ionosphere is not a homogenous region but consists of rather distinct layers or regions which have their own individual effects on radio propagation. The layers of distinct interest to radio amateurs are the E and F layers.
  4909. 
  4910. 189
  4911. The E layer at about 110 km is the lower of the two. It is in the denser region of the atmosphere where the ions formed by solar energy recombine quickly. This means the layer is densest at noon and dissipates quickly when the sun goes down.
  4912. The F layer is higher and during the day separates into two layers, F1 and F2 at about 225 and 320 km. It merges at night to form a single F layer at about 280 km.
  4913. The different layer of the ionosphere can reflect radio waves back down to earth which in turn can reflect the signal back up again. A signal can "hop" around the world in this way. The higher the layer, the longer the hop. The longer the hop the better since some of the signal's energy is lost at each hop.
  4914. Lower angle radiation will go farther before it reflects off the ionosphere. So to achieve greatest DX, one tries to choose a frequency that will reflect off the highest layer possible and use the lowest angle of radiation. The distance covered in one hop is the skip distance. For destinations beyond the maximum skip distance the signal must make multiple hops. The virtual height of any ionospheric layer at any time can be determined using an ionospheric sounder or ionosonde, in effect a vertical radar. This sends pulses that sweep over a wide frequency range straight up into the ionosphere. The echoes returned are timed (for distance) and recorded. A plot of frequency against height can be produced. The highest frequency that returns echoes at vertical incidence is known as the critical frequency.
  4915. Absorption
  4916. The ionosphere can also absorb radio waves as well as reflect them. The absorption is greater at lower frequencies and with denser ionisation. There is another layer of ionisation below the E layer, called the D layer, which only exists during the day. It will absorb almost all signals below 4 MHz - i.e. the 80 and 160 metre bands. Short-range communication is still possible using higher angle radiation which is less affected. It travels a shorter distance through the atmosphere. The signal can then reflect off the E layer to the receiver. The D and E layers are responsible for you hearing only local AM broadcast stations during the day and more distant ones at night.
  4917. Attenuation
  4918. The attenuation of a signal by the ionosphere is higher at lower frequencies. So for greater distance communication one should use higher frequencies. But if the frequency used is too high, the signal will pass into space and not reflect back to earth. This may be good for satellite operation but is not useful for HF DX working.
  4919. For DX working on HF, one should try to use the highest frequency that will still reflect off the ionosphere. This varies with solar activity and time of day. It can be calculated with various formulas given the current solar indices. This frequency is referred to as the Maximum Usable Frequency (MUF). In the peak of the solar cycle it can often be over 30 MHz and on rare occasions up to 50 MHz. At other times, during the night, it can drop below 10 MHz.
  4920. At the low end of the spectrum, daytime absorption by the D layer limits the possible range. In addition, atmospheric noise is greater and limits the Lowest Usable Frequency (LUF). This noise and absorption decreases at night lowering the LUF at the same time as the MUF is lowered by the decrease in solar excitation of the ionosphere. This usually means that by picking the right frequency, long range communication is possible at any time.
  4921. 190
  4922. Fading
  4923. Radio waves can travel over different paths from transmitter to receiver. If a path length varies by a multiple of half the wavelength of the signal, the signals arriving by two or more paths may completely cancel each other. This multi-path action causes fading of the signal. Other phenomena can cause this. Aircraft, mountains and ionospheric layers can reflect part of a signal while another part takes a more direct path.
  4924. Sometimes fading may be so frequency-dependent that one sideband of a double- sideband (AM) signal may be completely unreadable while the other is "good copy". This is known as "selective fading". It will often be observed just as a band is on the verge of closing, when reflections from two layers are received simultaneously.
  4925. Fading can also occur when a signal passes through the polar regions, referred to as polar flutter, caused by different phenomena. The ionosphere is much more disorganised in the polar regions because of the interaction of solar energy with the geomagnetic field. The same phenomena that cause aurora can cause the wavering of signals on polar paths.
  4926. Other atmospheric effects
  4927. Other atmospheric effects can affect radio propagation and may often extend the transmission of VHF and higher signals beyond the line-of-sight. The lowest region in the atmosphere, the troposphere, can scatter VHF signals more than 600 km - tropospheric scatter. Ducting is a phenomenon where radio waves get trapped by a variation in the atmospheric density. The waves can then travel along by refraction. Ducting usually occurs over water or other homogenous surfaces. This is more common at higher frequencies and has permitted UHF communication over distances greater than 2500 km.
  4928. Another phenomenon, sporadic E skip, is a seasonal occurrence, usually during the summer. A small region of the E layer becomes more highly charged than usual, permitting the reflection of signals as high in frequency as 200 MHz. This highly-charged region soon dissipates. Sporadic E propagation will occur for only a few minutes to a few hours. Communication can be achieved by bouncing signals off the ionised trails of meteors. Meteor scatter communication may only last a few seconds so it is feasible only when large numbers of meteors enter the atmosphere, particularly during times of meteor showers. Skip zone
  4929. Amateurs are usually concerned about working to the maximum possible distances but there are times when one can talk to people thousands of kilometres away but cannot talk to someone only 500 km away. A skip zone can be created by the ionosphere reflecting signals from a shallow angle. Waves at a higher angle pass directly through and are lost into space. The critical angle varies with the degree of ionisation and generally results in larger
  4930. skip zones at night. The area between the limit of maximum range by direct wave or ground wave, and the maximum skip distance by skywave is known as the skip zone.
  4931. 
  4932. 191
  4933. Question File: 28. Propagation: (5 questions)
  4934. 1. A 'skip zone' is:
  4935. a. the distance between the antenna and where the refracted wave first returns to
  4936. earth
  4937. b. the distance between the far end of the ground wave and where the refracted
  4938. wave first returns to earth
  4939. c. the distance between any two refracted waves
  4940. d. a zone caused by lost sky waves
  4941. ==================
  4942. 2. The medium which reflects high frequency radio waves back to the earth's surface
  4943. is called the:
  4944. a. biosphere
  4945. b. stratosphere
  4946. c. ionosphere
  4947. d. troposphere
  4948. ==================
  4949. 3. The highest frequency that will be reflected back to the earth at any given time is
  4950. known as the:
  4951. a. UHF
  4952. b. MUF
  4953. c. OWF
  4954. d. LUF
  4955. ==================
  4956. 4. All communications frequencies throughout the spectrum are affected in varying
  4957. degrees by the:
  4958. a. atmospheric conditions
  4959. b. ionosphere
  4960. c. aurora borealis
  4961. d. sun
  4962. ==================
  4963. 5. Solar cycles have an average length of:
  4964. a. 1 year
  4965. b. 3 years
  4966. c. 6 years
  4967. d. 11 years
  4968. ==================
  4969. 6. The 'skywave' is another name for the:
  4970. a. ionospheric wave
  4971. b. tropospheric wave
  4972. c. ground wave
  4973. d. inverted wave
  4974. ==================
  4975. 192
  4976. 7. The polarisation of an electromagnetic wave is defined by the direction of:
  4977. a. the H field
  4978. b. propagation
  4979. c. the E field
  4980. d. the receiving antenna
  4981. ==================
  4982. 8. That portion of HF radiation which is directly affected by the surface of the earth is
  4983. called:
  4984. a. ionospheric wave
  4985. b. local field wave
  4986. c. ground wave
  4987. d. inverted wave
  4988. ==================
  4989. 9. Radio wave energy on frequencies below 4 MHz during daylight hours is almost completely absorbed by this ionospheric layer:
  4990. a. C
  4991. b. D
  4992. c. E
  4993. d. F
  4994. ==================
  4995. 10. Because of high absorption levels at frequencies below 4 MHz during daylight
  4996. hours, only high angle signals are normally reflected back by this layer:
  4997. a. C
  4998. b. D
  4999. c. E
  5000. d. F
  5001. ==================
  5002. 11. Scattered patches of high ionisation developed seasonally at the height of one of
  5003. the layers is called:
  5004. a. sporadic-E
  5005. b. patchy
  5006. c. random reflectors
  5007. d. trans-equatorial ionisation
  5008. ==================
  5009. 12. For long distance propagation, the radiation angle of energy from the antenna
  5010. should be:
  5011. a. less than 30 degrees
  5012. b. more than 30 degrees but less than forty-five
  5013. c. more than 45 degrees but less than ninety
  5014. d. 90 degrees
  5015. ==================
  5016. 13. The path radio waves normally follow from a transmitting antenna to a receiving antenna at VHF and higher frequencies is a:
  5017. a. circular path going north or south from the transmitter
  5018. b. great circle path
  5019. c. straight line
  5020. d. bent path via the ionosphere
  5021. ==================
  5022. 14. A radio wave may follow two or more different paths during propagation and
  5023. produce slowly-changing phase differences between signals at the receiver
  5024. resulting in a phenomenon called:
  5025. a. absorption
  5026. b. baffling
  5027. c. fading
  5028. d. skip
  5029. ==================
  5030. 15. The distance from the far end of the ground wave to the nearest point where the
  5031. sky wave returns to the earth is called the:
  5032. a. skip distance
  5033. b. radiation distance
  5034. c. skip angle
  5035. d. skip zone
  5036. ==================
  5037. 16. High Frequency long-distance propagation is most dependent on:
  5038. a. ionospheric reflection
  5039. b. tropospheric reflection
  5040. c. ground reflection
  5041. d. inverted reflection
  5042. ==================
  5043. 17. The layer of the ionosphere mainly responsible for long distance communication
  5044. is:
  5045. a. C
  5046. b. D
  5047. c. E
  5048. d. F
  5049. ==================
  5050. 18. The ionisation level of the ionosphere reaches its minimum:
  5051. a. just after sunset
  5052. b. just before sunrise
  5053. c. at noon
  5054. d. at midnight
  5055. ==================
  5056. 19. One of the ionospheric layers splits into two parts during the day called:
  5057. a. A&B
  5058. b. D1&D2
  5059. c. E1&E2
  5060. d. F1&F2
  5061. ==================
  5062. 193
  5063. 194
  5064. 20. Signal fadeouts resulting from an 'ionospheric storm' or 'sudden ionospheric disturbance' are usually attributed to:
  5065. a. heating of the ionised layers
  5066. b. over-use of the signal path
  5067. c. insufficient transmitted power
  5068. d. solar flare activity
  5069. ==================
  5070. 21. The 80 metre band is useful for working:
  5071. a. in the summer at midday during high sunspot activity
  5072. b. long distance during daylight hours when absorption is not significant
  5073. c. all points on the earth's surface
  5074. d. up to several thousand kilometres in darkness but atmospheric and man-made
  5075. noises tend to be high
  5076. ==================
  5077. 22. The skip distance of radio signals is determined by the:
  5078. a. type of transmitting antenna used
  5079. b. power fed to the final amplifier of the transmitter
  5080. c. only the angle of radiation from the antenna
  5081. d. both the height of the ionosphere and the angle of radiation from the antenna
  5082. ==================
  5083. 23. Three recognised layers of the ionosphere that affect radio propagation are:
  5084. a. A,E,F
  5085. b. B,D,E
  5086. c. C,E,F
  5087. d. D,E,F
  5088. ==================
  5089. 24. Propagation on 80 metres during the summer daylight hours is limited to relatively
  5090. short distances because of
  5091. a. high absorption in the D layer
  5092. b. the disappearance of the E layer
  5093. c. poor refraction by the F layer
  5094. d. pollution in the T layer
  5095. ==================
  5096. 25. The distance from the transmitter to the nearest point where the sky wave returns
  5097. to the earth is called the:
  5098. a. angle of radiation
  5099. b. maximum usable frequency
  5100. c. skip distance
  5101. d. skip zone
  5102. ==================
  5103. 26. A variation in received signal strength caused by slowly changing differences in path lengths is called:
  5104. a. absorption
  5105. b. fading
  5106. c. fluctuation
  5107. d. path loss
  5108. ==================
  5109. 195
  5110. 27. VHF and UHF bands are frequently used for satellite communication because:
  5111. a. waves at these frequencies travel to and from the satellite relatively unaffected by
  5112. the ionosphere
  5113. b. the Doppler frequency change caused by satellite motion is much less than at HF
  5114. c. satellites move too fast for HF waves to follow
  5115. d. the Doppler effect would cause HF waves to be shifted into the VHF and UHF
  5116. bands.
  5117. ==================
  5118. 28. The 'critical frequency' is defined as the:
  5119. a. highest frequency to which your transmitter can be tuned
  5120. b. lowest frequency which is reflected back to earth at vertical incidence
  5121. c. minimum usable frequency
  5122. d. highest frequency which will be reflected back to earth at vertical incidence
  5123. ==================
  5124. 29. The speed of a radio wave:
  5125. a. varies indirectly to the frequency
  5126. b. is the same as the speed of light
  5127. c. is infinite in space
  5128. d. is always less than half the speed of light
  5129. ==================
  5130. 30. The MUF for a given radio path is the:
  5131. a. mean of the maximum and minimum usable frequencies
  5132. b. maximum usable frequency
  5133. c. minimum usable frequency
  5134. d. mandatory usable frequency
  5135. ==================
  5136. 31. The position of the E layer in the ionosphere is:
  5137. a. above the F layer
  5138. b. below the F layer
  5139. c. below the D layer
  5140. d. sporadic
  5141. ==================
  5142. 32. A distant amplitude-modulated station is heard quite loudly but the modulation is at
  5143. times severely distorted. A similar local station is not affected. The probable cause
  5144. of this is:
  5145. a. transmitter malfunction
  5146. b. selective fading
  5147. c. a sudden ionospheric disturbance
  5148. d. front end overload
  5149. ==================
  5150. 33. Skip distance is a term associated with signals through the ionosphere. Skip
  5151. effects are due to:
  5152. a. reflection and refraction from the ionosphere
  5153. b. selective fading of local signals
  5154. c. high gain antennas being used
  5155. d. local cloud cover
  5156. ==================
  5157. 196
  5158. 34. The type of atmospheric layers which will best return signals to earth are:
  5159. a. oxidised layers
  5160. b. heavy cloud layers
  5161. c. ionised layers
  5162. d. sun spot layers
  5163. ==================
  5164. 35. The ionosphere:
  5165. a. is a magnetised belt around the earth
  5166. b. consists of magnetised particles around the earth
  5167. c. is formed from layers of ionised gases around the earth
  5168. d. is a spherical belt of solar radiation around the earth
  5169. ==================
  5170. 36. The skip distance of a sky wave will be greatest when the:
  5171. a. ionosphere is most densely ionised
  5172. b. signal given out is strongest
  5173. c. angle of radiation is smallest
  5174. d. polarisation is vertical
  5175. ==================
  5176. 37. If the height of the reflecting layer of the ionosphere increases, the skip distance of
  5177. a high frequency transmission:
  5178. a. stays the same
  5179. b. decreases
  5180. c. varies regularly
  5181. d. becomes greater
  5182. ==================
  5183. 38. If the frequency of a transmitted signal is so high that we no longer receive a
  5184. reflection from the ionosphere, the signal frequency is above the:
  5185. a. speed of light
  5186. b. sun spot frequency
  5187. c. skip distance
  5188. d. maximum usable frequency
  5189. ==================
  5190. 39. A 'line of sight' transmission between two stations uses mainly the:
  5191. a. ionosphere
  5192. b. troposphere
  5193. c. sky wave
  5194. d. ground wave
  5195. ==================
  5196. 40. The distance travelled by ground waves in air:
  5197. a. is the same for all frequencies
  5198. b. is less at higher frequencies
  5199. c. is more at higher frequencies
  5200. d. depends on the maximum usable frequency
  5201. ==================
  5202. 197
  5203. 41. The radio wave from the transmitter to the ionosphere and back to earth is correctly known as the:
  5204. a. sky wave
  5205. b. skip wave
  5206. c. surface wave
  5207. d. F layer
  5208. ==================
  5209. 42. Reception of high frequency radio waves beyond 4000 km normally occurs by the:
  5210. a. ground wave
  5211. b. skip wave
  5212. c. surface wave
  5213. d. sky wave
  5214. ==================
  5215. 43. A 28 MHz radio signal is more likely to be heard over great distances:
  5216. a. if the transmitter power is reduced
  5217. b. during daylight hours
  5218. c. only during the night
  5219. d. at full moon
  5220. ==================
  5221. 44. The number of high frequency bands open to long distance communication at any
  5222. time depends on:
  5223. a. the highest frequency at which ionospheric reflection can occur
  5224. b. the number of frequencies the receiver can tune
  5225. c. the power being radiated by the transmitting station
  5226. d. the height of the transmitting antenna
  5227. ==================
  5228. 45. Regular changes in the ionosphere occur approximately every 11:
  5229. a. days
  5230. b. months
  5231. c. years
  5232. d. centuries
  5233. ==================
  5234. 46. When a HF transmitted radio signal reaches a receiver, small changes in the
  5235. ionosphere can cause:
  5236. a. consistently stronger signals
  5237. b. a change in the ground wave signal
  5238. c. variations in signal strength
  5239. d. consistently weaker signals
  5240. ==================
  5241. 47. The usual effect of ionospheric storms is to:
  5242. a. increase the maximum usable frequency
  5243. b. cause a fade-out of sky-wave signals
  5244. c. produce extreme weather changes
  5245. d. prevent communications by ground wave
  5246. ==================
  5247. 198
  5248. 48. Changes in received signal strength when sky wave propagation is used are called:
  5249. a. ground wave losses
  5250. b. modulation losses
  5251. c. fading
  5252. d. sunspots
  5253. ==================
  5254. 49. Although high frequency signals may be received from a distant station by a sky wave at a certain time, it may not be possible to hear them an hour later. This may be due to:
  5255. a. changes in the ionosphere
  5256. b. shading of the earth by clouds
  5257. c. changes in atmospheric temperature
  5258. d. absorption of the ground wave signal
  5259. ==================
  5260. 50. VHF or UHF signals transmitted towards a tall building are often received at a
  5261. more distant point in another direction because:
  5262. a. these waves are easily bent by the ionosphere
  5263. b. these waves are easily reflected by objects in their path
  5264. c. you can never tell in which direction a wave is travelling
  5265. d. tall buildings have elevators
  5266. ==================
  5267. 199
  5268. Section 29 Interference and Filtering
  5269. Filters
  5270. Filters can be active or passive. Passive filters, comprised of inductors and capacitors, are used for the suppression of unwanted signals and interference. These are treated below.
  5271. Active filters use amplifying devices such as transistors or integrated circuits with feedback applied to achieve the required filter characteristics.
  5272. The "operational amplifier" is one such active device with features making it particularly suitable for filter applications up to a few megahertz. This diagram shows a typical example.
  5273. These can have a very high gain but with negative feedback applied, are usually operated to produce a circuit with unity gain. The input impedance to such a circuit can be very high. These circuits are compact, and able to have variable Q, centre, and cut-off frequencies. The circuit gain and performance can be adjusted by changes to the feedback network.
  5274. 200
  5275. Key clicks
  5276. In a CW transmission, the envelope of the keyed RF output waveform may be as shown in this upper diagram - a square-wave. When analysed this will be found to be composed of a large number of sinewaves.
  5277. These sidebands may extend over an wide part of the adjacent band and be annoying to listeners - a form of click or thud each time your key is operated.
  5278. To prevent this happening, the high-frequency components of the keying waveform must be attenuated. In practice this means preventing any sudden changes in the amplitude of the RF signal. With suitable shaping, it is possible to produce an envelope waveform as shown in the lower diagram.
  5279. 
  5280. Filter passbands
  5281. 201
  5282. One means for doing this is a key-click filter as shown in this diagram. When the key contacts close, the inductance of the iron-cored choke prevents the key current from rising too suddenly. When the contacts are broken, the capacitor keeps the keyed current going for a short period. The resistor prevents the discharge current from being excessive.
  5283. Note that the body of the key is at earth potential at all times - for safety reasons.
  5284. Interference
  5285. Radio transmissions can cause interference to other Radio Services and to nearby electronic equipment. Some Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) can render some equipment completely useless.
  5286. The term "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC), is the preferred title and reflects the need for all devices to co-exist together in the same electromagnetic environment.
  5287. The responsibility for avoidance of, and the suppression of, interference to other Radio Services, is a Radio Regulatory matter is considered in the section on Regulations
  5288. This Interference and Filtering section will consider the causes of and solutions to common RFI problems - problems that arise when your transmitted signal "gets into" your own and other television receivers and other appliances.
  5289. It is important, for domestic and for neighbourhood harmony, to be able to correct manufacturing deficiencies in consumer electronics.
  5290. Filters form the basis of many RFI circuits. A filter is a frequency-selective circuit which passes signals of certain frequencies while attenuating others. Filters are able to select desired frequencies from undesired frequencies so they are fundamental to suppressing interference.
  5291. Typical measures of a filter are its cut-off frequency and its Q.
  5292. The cut-off frequency is defined as the frequency at which the signal will be reduced to half the power of the maximum signal passed. The Q (or quality) of a filter is a measure of how "sharp" the filter is. High-Q filters are those with a relatively narrow bandwidth,
  5293. 
  5294. 202
  5295. while low-Q filters have a relatively wide bandwidth. A filter's bandwidth is the frequency separation between cut-off frequencies.
  5296. This diagram shows the four common filter types. They are easy to recognise.
  5297. Low Pass filters exhibit the typical characteristic shown in 1. High Pass is shown in 2.
  5298. Band Pass is shown in 3.
  5299. Band Stop in 4.
  5300. These diagrams are for demonstration only. Practical filters exhibit considerable differences and more pronounced characteristics.
  5301. Broadcast and Television Interference
  5302. TV interference is of two types -
  5303. TV receivers which radiate spurious emissions and cause interference to the signals you are trying to receive on the amateur bands, and
  5304. interference which your transmissions cause to TV reception on adjacent television receivers.
  5305. It is the second variety that is the more important and the more difficult.
  5306. The text following is based on the NZART document: "A Code of Practice for Radio and
  5307. Television Interference Cases" dated 1981, published in "Break-In" October 1981.
  5308. A copy of the original document can be obtained from NZART Headquarters, P.O. Box 40- 525, Upper Hutt or at mailto:nzart@clear.net.nz . Please give this reference to the month and year of this "Break-In" issue and your postal address.
  5309. A Code of Practice for Radio and Television Interference Cases
  5310. 1. Introduction
  5311. This is a guide for radio amateurs whose operations come to the attention of neighbours through disturbance to reception of sound broadcast and television transmissions (BCI and TVI). This disturbance is a continuing risk in amateur radio, and all radio amateurs can expect to cause or to be accused of causing BCI or TVI at some time. The interference is not damaging and the accusation does not bring any disgrace.
  5312. Interference between one radio service and another is inevitable from time to time, because all services share the one radio frequency spectrum.
  5313. 
  5314. 203
  5315. You must face the problem only when it arises, and you should not worry about it beforehand. You should not fear a TVI or BCI report in any way or restrict your activities or hours of operation because a report may arise.
  5316. The best advice is this: ensure that the apparatus in your own home is free from interference caused by your amateur radio activities--and be active on the air. In all cases of interference, a cure is possible. Problems can be cured only as they arise. In reading this guide, which treats TVI in greater detail, bear in mind that in BCI cases you must take a similar approach.
  5317. The exact procedure to follow in interference cases cannot be laid down. Each case differs. Neighbours have been known to complain of interference after a radio amateur has erected a new aerial but before it has been used for transmitting. In other cases, neighbours have tolerated overhearing transmissions because they like to feel informed. Few hard and-fast rules can be offered.
  5318. 2. BCI
  5319. Interference to broadcast-band receivers is often reported. The broadcast receiver cannot be considered to be of adequate design unless it has a radio-frequency amplifier stage and is connected to an outside aerial. An internal aerial or an aerial in the same room as the receiver is not to be accepted as satisfactory.
  5320. The amateur's transmissions may be able to be received at various points on the tuning dial, but the generally-accepted rule is that the case is one of interference only when reception of the local broadcast stations is disturbed.
  5321. 3. Interference to audio devices
  5322. By some reports, an amateur's transmissions are heard from record players, stereo grams, and similar audio devices that are not designed for the reception of radio transmissions.
  5323. On receiving a report of interference to such an audio device, courteously discuss the matter with the owner, and advise him to contact the supplier or his supplier’s agent to arrange for it to receive attention and to have the deficiency cured. These devices are not designed to be radio receivers.
  5324. 4. TVI
  5325. The important point to remember about TVI is that it can be cured. Bear this point in mind at all times. TVI must be challenged head-on and a cure found for each separate case. Unfortunately, there may be no easy way or shortcut.
  5326. 5 Preliminaries
  5327. 204
  5328. When you start transmitting from a new neighbourhood or with a new rig, first ensure that your own television set is absolutely free from TVI. Then operate without any self-imposed restrictions of any sort. That is, operate when you want to, for as long as you wish, on any authorised band, with any power up to your legal limit, and with no disturbance to your own television receiver.
  5329. A radio amateur's first operating concern should be to ensure that the television receiver in his own home is disturbance-free. It should not display any interference.when operation is taking place on the frequented amateur bands.
  5330. Your television receiver is very close to the transmitter and its aerial. Having your TV receiver ''clean" is important for several reasons, the first being that it promotes domestic or family harmony! Your receiver will be the subject of the first tests the MBIE RSM Official may want to make--and revealing a clean display on your own television set will incline him in your favour. Revealing a clean set can also help you to deal with neighbours who do not believe that the fault lies in their own installation. If your own TV set is not TVI free, therefore you should make it so!
  5331. 6. The wait
  5332. Do not ask the neighbours for TVI reports. Let the neighbours first report the matter either to yourself or to the MBIE RSM. Wait for the TVI reports (if any) to come to you-- they may never come.
  5333. 7 . Reports
  5334. TVI reports can come from several directions and in several ways.
  5335. The neighbour may contact you or a member of your family. An MBIE RSM Official may contact you. The report may be very complete, may be garbled or incomplete, may be casual, or may be second or third hand. Be sure you recognise a TVI report as such, and note it well.
  5336. 8. Action upon receiving a report
  5337. a. Do not delay. Attend to the matter promptly.
  5338. b. Check what you learn against your own operating activities and against your log. Have you changed bands, changed aerials, or built a new amplifier? Does the report coincide with changes to your installation or operating habits?
  5339. c. Check that any interference is in fact due to you. Be sure that it is not from a neighbour's new electric drill, arc welder, or other appliance, or from some other source.
  5340. d. Check with family members who view your own television set. Was any interference observed at the time claimed?
  5341. 205
  5342. e. Show concern, but do not admit any responsibility for the interference at this stage. Wait until tests have been conducted.
  5343. f. Determine whether the MBIE RSM staff have or have not been notified.
  5344. g. Get full details of the interference, the time, the channel, and the nature of the interference on picture and on the sound. Has it just started, or is the problem of long standing?
  5345. h. Details of the model or type of television receiver, feeder, and aerial are also useful.
  5346. i. Start a notebook with date, time, and details of the report. Because even cases with big problems have small beginnings, start an accurate record early. You cannot be sure of the final outcome.
  5347. j. Above all don't worry.
  5348. 9. When should you contact the MBIE RSM?
  5349. This depends on the nature of the TVI report reaching you, the degree of co-operation shown by the neighbours, and how well you know them. If the neighbour directs threats or abuse at you, or is not known to you, or claims that the fault is wholly yours, do not hesitate to notify the MBIE RSM by telephone.
  5350. You would be wise to be prepared to give a short history of any previous TVI problems you have experienced in this same location. Have you cured similar problems? This is where the notebook becomes useful.
  5351. If you do not show any TVI on your own set, continue to operate until the matter can be investigated.
  5352. If your neighbour is co-operative and is prepared to let you or a friend examine the set; then offer to do some tests to try to reproduce the conditions that gave rise to the interference. You may be able to cure the problem without involving the MED RSM staff at all.
  5353. Please be aware that the MBIE RSM may charge someone for their services. Make enquiries first to determine any costs involved and where their account is likely to be directed. This may depend on where the source of the interference is finally found.
  5354. 10. The cause
  5355. The technical mechanism or whatever generates the interference or disturbance must be established early to determine:
  5356. a. The cure necessary, and,
  5357. 206
  5358. b. Who is responsible for affecting a cure, and, c. Who is to pay any expenses involved.
  5359. Because tests must be carried out to determine this mechanism, the following are necessary:
  5360. a. Access to the television set for tests,
  5361. b. Operation of the transmitting equipment, and,
  5362. c. Someone with TVI tracing experience to decide which tests should be done, to carry out the tests, and to interpret the results.
  5363. This means that the radio amateur and the neighbour must be present for the period of the tests. That is, co-operation is necessary.
  5364. The tests may or may not be conducted by the MBIE RSM. They could be conducted by some other competent person provided the co-operation of the neighbour is assured.
  5365. Note that one or more mechanisms may be creating the interference, and so more than one cure may be necessary at any television installation. At any one transmitter site, the disturbance in adjacent television receivers may be generated by quite different mechanisms.
  5366. 11. The problems
  5367. The two problems that arise with TVI are:
  5368. a. Technical, and,
  5369. b. Social.
  5370. Few people will comment on which is the more difficult! The technical cause may be: a. At the transmitter installation, or,
  5371. b. At the receiver installation, or, c. Somewhere else, or,
  5372. d. Combinations of these.
  5373. 12. The tests
  5374. The first tests should be elementary:
  5375. 207
  5376. a. Check the TV installation. Is the aerial in good order? Is it installed in accordance with accepted practice? Is the ribbon / coax in good order? Is a balun fitted? Is the aerial adequate for the TV field strength at the site? Is the aerial suitable for the TV channels received at the site? Check the suitability of the aerial mount. Check the joints between feeder and aerial elements. Do not assume that because a television aerial has been commercially installed that it will have been correctly installed. The requirements of a TV aerial to reject interference are more stringent than those for satisfactory reception when interference is absent. An aerial which gives satisfactory reception when installed may prove inadequate later when a source of interference comes into being.
  5377. b. Have another operator work the transmitter on the frequency from which interference is suspected. Note any disturbance to picture, colour, or sound. Make adjustments to accessible controls - fine tuning, contrast, and colour. Check all television channels. A VHF link to the transmitter operator is useful for co-ordination
  5378. c. Substitute another television receiver (perhaps a different model) and repeat the tests. Use a television set known to be TVI-free in a similar location.
  5379. d. Do not remove the back from the television set. Confine tests to operational tests, intended only to identify the nature of the disturbance, but try a high-pass filter (if available) in the television aerial lead if a quick diagnosis decides that this might help, if the neighbour agrees.
  5380. e. Obtain details of the set's make and model. Is it under guarantee? How old is it? Who supplied it? Is it under a service contract? Who maintains it? Is it a rental set?
  5381. f. Has an official from the MBIE RSM viewed the set? Does the MBIE RSM know of the problem ?
  5382. g. Keep the test short, make no promises, and do not give an opinion at the site. Withdraw, consult textbooks and other persons for advice, and then decide on a course of action.
  5383. 13. The rusty-bolt effect
  5384. High-pass filters (at the television receiver aerial terminals) and low-pass filters (at the transmitter) do not always cure TVI problems. Substitution of other TV sets can generally show if the cause is a faulty transmitter or faulty television receiver, but if substitution shows the interference effect to continue, then the cause becomes more difficult to establish. The ''rusty-bolt" effect is one of the hardest of all these TVI causes to locate.
  5385. If a known clean transmitter is causing interference to a known good television receiver, then an external cause can be suspected. Perhaps the transmitter signal is being picked up by a local conductor such as a clothes-line or fence-wire. A rusty or corroded joint in this conductor may be acting as a diode. Harmonics of the transmitter signal could be produced by this spurious diode detector and re-radiated. These harmonics can be received by the television receiver and cause interference to the picture or sound.
  5386. 208
  5387. Such interference may vary with the weather. It may be intermittent and be affected by wind as well as rain.
  5388. Typical offenders are metal-tile roofs, metal gutters and down pipes. A heavy blow with a hammer may sometimes correct an offending joint. Applying water from a hose can sometimes change or remove the interfering source and help to identify the culprit.
  5389. Either bonding or insulating the offending joint may solve the problem. More than one joint may be causing trouble. Bonding is generally impossible with metal tiles. Shifting the television aerial away from the offending harmonic source or sources is a more practical cure. A bonded wire mesh over the offending joint may be considered. It is unlikely that a complete metal roof will have to be bonded to effect a cure.
  5390. Bonding suspect joints can sometimes produce problems. With bonded conductors, a better signal pick-up may result, larger radio frequency currents may flow, and the problem may shift to another joint that was hitherto not suspect. Insulating the suspect joints may sometimes be more effective. A change to nylon guy-wires may sometimes eliminate problem joints.
  5391. The accepted rule is that if the offending joints are on the amateur's property, the problem is his. If the offending joints are on the property of the television set's owner the problem is his, Unfortunately, few set-owners understand this problem and so the radio amateur should offer technical assistance and advice. Re-siting the television set aerial or the transmitting aerial is often the only practicable cure.
  5392. 14. Guarantees and service contracts
  5393. If the television set has been shown to be faulty and is under a guarantee or a service contract, then give the firm concerned early advice of the problem. This is best done after the MBIE RSM has been advised and the problem discussed. Advise the firm concerned that the MBIE RSM is aware of the problem. These actions are really the concern of the television set's owner, but the radio amateur may offer to assist.
  5394. 15. Rental sets
  5395. Rental sets should be treated in the same way as a set with a service contract. A rental set has the advantage that a change to another model may be possible, which could cure an otherwise difficult problem.
  5396. 16. Getting involved with other people's gear
  5397. As a radio amateur, you should be aware of the undesirability of agreeing to fix a neighbour's equipment. The equipment may be under guarantee, may be covered by a service contract, or may be rented. It may not belong to the person who is using it, who may not always be honest and forthright about ownership. Where to draw the line depends
  5398. 209
  5399. very much on how well you know the neighbour, and other factors, such as the age of the set, and the nature of the problem itself.
  5400. Your ''unauthorised tampering" may invalidate guarantees and service contracts. Future problems with the equipment - in no way related to the interference problem - will without doubt be blamed on the radio amateur. No radio amateur wants to be concerned with the maintenance of his neighbour's equipment for evermore. The possibility of double-blame must be avoided (first the interference, and then of damaging the set).
  5401. Safety and Regulations are good reasons for keeping out of a neighbour's set. Many modern television receivers may operate with the chassis alive - at about half mains voltage. This also means that short lengths of coaxial cable inside the set (to the aerial isolation unit) could appear to have the outer at earth potential, but in fact this outer could be at a hazardous potential. Under the various Electrical Acts and Electrical Regulations, a radio amateur is not qualified to service mains-operated television receivers.
  5402. 17. What level of interference is tolerable?
  5403. Slight disturbances on a television test pattern which are barely noticed by a trained eye will not be seen on a television picture.
  5404. Disturbances of the same level as the noise on the picture, and less than interference from motor vehicle ignition, electrical appliance noise or aircraft flutter, are acceptable.
  5405. Tearing of the picture, herringbones, or switching between colour and black and white are unacceptable.
  5406. The last trace of TVI may be slight changes at the areas of intense red in a picture. This is acceptable for unless attention is drawn to it, it will be unnoticed.
  5407. Noises from an adjacent transmitter should not be heard during pauses in the television sound.
  5408. It is wise not to draw the attention of the owner to minor disturbances. Instead, check if he is satisfied with the quality of reception. The neighbour should be unable to tell when you are transmitting.
  5409. 18. Contact with the equipment manufacturer
  5410. Where substitution of another set or other tests have shown that the fault is within a particular television receiver or other piece of commercial equipment, consider approaching the manufacturer of the equipment. When or how this should be done depends on the attitude of the local agent for the equipment, and the status of the guarantee or service contract. Ideally, the local supplier of the equipment should handle communications with the manufacturer in cases where a manufacturer's modification or the expense of a local modification arises. Again the radio amateur may offer to assist the owner.
  5411. 210
  5412. If you approach a manufacturer, be certain to include details of model type and serial numbers, age of set, installation arrangements, tests conducted and their results, and any other details that will help in an analysis of the problem, diagnosis of its cause, and the development of a cure.
  5413. 19. The radio amateur's responsibility for the cure
  5414. The radio amateur should accept responsibility for being the cause of TVI, only if carefully conducted tests have established:
  5415. a. That his transmitting installation is faulty, or,
  5416. b. That, in the substitution of another transmitter of comparable characteristics, the problem disappears, or,
  5417. c. That, in more than one adjacent television set, previously TVI-free, the same interference symptoms suddenly appear at the same time, and coincide with transmissions from the amateur's transmitter, or,
  5418. d. That a parasitic rectifying joint on the radio amateur's own premises is generating interfering signal components.
  5419. 20. The television set owner's responsibility for the cure.
  5420. The owner or user of the television set must accept responsibility for curing the interference if carefully conducted tests show:
  5421. a. That no interference is exhibited on the radio amateur's own television receiver on the radio amateur's own premises, or,
  5422. b. That a high-pass filter or other trap device on the television aerial eliminates the interference, or,
  5423. c. That any parasitic rectifying junction is shown to be located on the property of the television set's owner or user, or,
  5424. d. That another television receiver substituted at the television installation fails to display the same interference, or,
  5425. e. That other attention at the television installation will cure the interference; for example, repairs to the aerial or feeder, or a shift of the television aerial to another position.
  5426. 22. The viewers' choice
  5427. 211
  5428. If a television viewer chooses to view television programmes on a defective set, or a set with a defective installation, he should not expect a radio amateur to cease transmissions to remove the disturbances to his viewing.
  5429. 25. Terminology
  5430. Be careful with the use of words. An amateur transmitter does not "interfere with'' or ''cause interference'' to television reception until properly conducted tests have clearly established that the fault is in the transmitting equipment or the transmitting installation.
  5431. A properly adjusted transmitter, radiating a ''clean" signal, does not ''radiate interference'' or ''cause interference". Disturbances to television reception should not be described as "interference" if the television set has deficiencies in its design or installation that cause it to respond to signals from a "clean'' transmitter.
  5432. A faulty television receiver or installation that responds to the amateur transmitter's ''clean'' signal does not exhibit "interference'' - although this is the term often given to it (TVI). ''Reception is being disturbed'' is a better description.
  5433. If the transmitter is faulty and radiates energy that enters the television set at the television channel frequencies, then this is clearly a case of ''interference''. The amateur transmitter is then ''radiating an interfering signal''.
  5434. If the fault is at the television receiver, and the transmitter is blameless, then the transmitter cannot be said to be ''causing interference".
  5435. 26. The approach
  5436. Be tactful when explaining to a neighbour that his television receiver or installation is faulty. An explanation such as follows is satisfactory and typical:
  5437. ''You have a very good set. It displays each channel very well, with good crisp pictures and pleasant sound. Unfortunately, it also responds to signals not meant for it, and this means it is defective. Other sets in the area are known to be unaffected in this way ... By means of some tests, we can determine if the fault is inside the set, or if it can be cured by changes to your aerial, or if your installation needs a filter or trap added to the aerial lead.'' The punch line ''it also responds to signals not meant for it, and this means it is defective should be carefully explained.
  5438. Contact with the neighbours may be by a visit, telephone, or a formal letter. The procedure to adopt depends how approachable they are, how well you know them, and where the TVI report came from, and how it was conveyed to you. There is a need to explain to the layman what Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) is, and what radio amateurs do.
  5439. 27. No guarantees possible for TVI cures
  5440. 212
  5441. The possibility of a TVI report is ever present. Once a cure has been effected to a TVI case, there is no known way of ensuring that the same set will not again become subject to TVI at some later time, perhaps by other cause. Damage and corrosion takes its toll of aerials and earthing systems.
  5442. Sets age and become faulty. The radio frequency spectrum is a shared resource, and until we have new knowledge or techniques, all radio amateurs must learn to live with the possibility of a TVI case arising at any time and be trained in how to handle it when it does arise.
  5443. A radio amateur should not, and can not, give a neighbour a guarantee that a TVI cure just made will remain effective for any period.
  5444. 28. Fitting devices to a neighbour's set
  5445. It may be found that a high-pass filter, traps, stubs or other device fitted at the aerial terminals of a neighbour's TV set will cure disturbances to his viewing. It is important to leave a label or tag securely attached to the set, which gives reason for the installation of the device - otherwise the device may be removed by someone in the absence of an interfering signal ''because it has no effect"!
  5446. 29. Extra assistance
  5447. Every NZART Branch should designate a member of its Committee as Interference Officer, his duties being to receive requests for assistance on BCI / TVI matters from members. He should have power to enlist other technically qualified members of the Branch into a team to help any member who needs tests, diagnosis, negotiations, advice, and other support until the case is closed. Amateurs should be seen to be united - this is important.
  5448. An independent expert third party may be acceptable to a neighbour in difficult cases.
  5449. Branches should be aware that the NZART Council is in a position to help with problem BCI / TVI cases, particularly where added technical assistance is required, or where an amateur is under pressure from a local dignitary or influential person. NZART Council has the route through the NZART Administration Liaison Officer available for official negotiations on behalf of a member if the Council deems them necessary.
  5450. Difficult technical or social TVI/BCI interference problems should be notified to NZART promptly.
  5451. 30. Conclusion
  5452. Remember that all BCI and TVI cases are capable of being technically cured. All you need is patience to test, diagnose the problem, and work out a cure. Many good textbook and magazine articles have been published and are available. The problem is not yours alone. Other radio amateurs are available to help you, many having experience with the problem.
  5453. 213
  5454. The MBIE RSM are there to help. TVI and BCI are accepted as a part of radio life and technical progress.
  5455. The neighbour also has a part to play. Cooperation and patience are necessary. Don't allow yourself to worry, and don't allow your neighbour to think that you should stop your operations.
  5456. Question File: 29. Interference & filtering: (3 questions)
  5457. 1. Electromagnetic compatibility is:
  5458. a. two antennas facing each other
  5459. b. the ability of equipment to function satisfactorily in its own environment without
  5460. introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances
  5461. c. more than one relay solenoid operating simultaneously
  5462. d. the inability of equipment to function satisfactorily together and produce tolerable
  5463. electromagnetic disturbances
  5464. ==================
  5465. 2. On an amateur receiver, unwanted signals are found at every 15.625 kHz. This is probably due to:
  5466. a. a low-frequency government station
  5467. b. a remote radar station
  5468. c. radiation from a nearby TV line oscillator
  5469. d. none of these
  5470. ==================
  5471. 3. Narrow-band interference can be caused by:
  5472. a. transmitter harmonics
  5473. b. a neon sign
  5474. c. a shaver motor
  5475. d. lightning flashes
  5476. ==================
  5477. 4. Which of the following is most likely to cause broad-band continuous interference:
  5478. a. an electric blanket switch
  5479. b. a refrigerator thermostat
  5480. c. a microwave transmitter
  5481. d. poor commutation in an electric motor
  5482. ==================
  5483. 5. If broadband noise interference varies when it rains, the most likely cause could be
  5484. from:
  5485. a. underground power cables
  5486. b. outside overhead power lines
  5487. c. car ignitions
  5488. d. your antenna connection
  5489. ==================
  5490. 214
  5491. 6. Before explaining to a neighbour that the reported interference is due to a lack of immunity in the neighbour's electronic equipment:
  5492. a. disconnect all your equipment from their power sources
  5493. b. write a letter to the MBIE
  5494. c. make sure that there is no interference on your own domestic equipment
  5495. d. ignore all complaints and take no action
  5496. ==================
  5497. 7. A neighbour's stereo system is suffering RF break-through. One possible cure is
  5498. to:
  5499. a. put a ferrite bead on the transmitter output lead
  5500. b. put a capacitor across the transmitter output
  5501. c. use open-wire feeders to the antenna
  5502. d. use screened wire for the loudspeaker leads
  5503. ==================
  5504. 8. When living in a densely-populated area, it is wise to:
  5505. a. always use maximum transmitter output power
  5506. b. use the minimum transmitter output power necessary
  5507. c. only transmit during popular television programme times
  5508. d. point the beam at the maximum number of television antennas
  5509. ==================
  5510. 9. When someone in the neighbourhood complains of TVI it is wise to:
  5511. a. deny all responsibility
  5512. b. immediately blame the other equipment
  5513. c. inform all the other neighbours
  5514. d. check your log to see if it coincides with your transmissions
  5515. ==================
  5516. 10. Cross-modulation is usually caused by:
  5517. a. rectification of strong signals in overloaded stages
  5518. b. key-clicks generated at the transmitter
  5519. c. improper filtering in the transmitter
  5520. d. lack of receiver sensitivity and selectivity
  5521. ==================
  5522. 11. When the signal from a transmitter overloads the audio stages of a broadcast
  5523. receiver, the transmitted signal:
  5524. a. can be heard irrespective of where the receiver is tuned
  5525. b. appears only when a broadcast station is received
  5526. c. is distorted on voice peaks
  5527. d. appears on only one frequency
  5528. ==================
  5529. 12. Cross-modulation of a broadcast receiver by a nearby transmitter would be noticed
  5530. in the receiver as:
  5531. a. a lack of signals being received
  5532. b. the undesired signal in the background of the desired signal
  5533. c. interference only when a broadcast signal is received
  5534. d. distortion on transmitted voice peaks
  5535. ==================
  5536. 215
  5537. 13. Unwanted signals from a radio transmitter which cause harmful interference to other users are known as:
  5538. a. rectified signals
  5539. b. re-radiation signals
  5540. c. reflected signals
  5541. d. harmonic and other spurious signals
  5542. ==================
  5543. 14. To reduce harmonic output from a transmitter, the following could be put in the
  5544. transmission line as close to the transmitter as possible:
  5545. a. wave trap
  5546. b. low-pass filter
  5547. c. high-pass filter
  5548. d. band reject filter
  5549. ==================
  5550. 15. To reduce energy from an HF transmitter getting into a television receiver, the
  5551. following could be placed in the TV antenna lead as close to the TV as possible:
  5552. a. active filter
  5553. b. low-pass filter
  5554. c. high-pass filter
  5555. d. band reject filter
  5556. ==================
  5557. 16. A low-pass filter used to eliminate the radiation of unwanted signals is connected
  5558. to the:
  5559. a. output of the balanced modulator
  5560. b. output of the amateur transmitter
  5561. c. input of the stereo system
  5562. d. input of the mixer stage of your SSB transmitter
  5563. ==================
  5564. 17. A band-pass filter will:
  5565. a. pass frequencies each side of a band
  5566. b. attenuate low frequencies but not high frequencies
  5567. c. attenuate frequencies each side of a band
  5568. d. attenuate high frequencies but not low frequencies
  5569. ==================
  5570. 18. A band-stop filter will:
  5571. a. pass frequencies each side of a band
  5572. b. stop frequencies each side of a band
  5573. c. only allow one spot frequency through
  5574. d. pass frequencies below 100 MHz
  5575. ==================
  5576. 19. A low-pass filter for a high frequency transmitter output would:
  5577. a. attenuate frequencies above 30 MHz
  5578. b. pass audio frequencies below 3 kHz
  5579. c. attenuate frequencies below 30 MHz
  5580. d. pass audio frequencies above 3 kHz
  5581. ==================
  5582. 216
  5583. 20. Installing a low-pass filter between the transmitter and transmission line will:
  5584. a. permit higher frequency signals to pass to the antenna
  5585. b. ensure an SWR not exceeding 2:1
  5586. c. reduce the power output back to the legal maximum
  5587. d. permit lower frequency signals to pass to the antenna
  5588. ==================
  5589. 21. A low-pass filter may be used in an amateur radio installation:
  5590. a. to attenuate signals lower in frequency than the transmission
  5591. b. to attenuate signals higher in frequency than the transmission
  5592. c. to boost the output power of the lower frequency transmissions
  5593. d. to boost the power of higher frequency transmissions
  5594. ==================
  5595. 22. Television interference caused by harmonics radiated from an amateur transmitter
  5596. could be eliminated by fitting:
  5597. a. a low-pass filter in the TV receiver antenna input
  5598. b. a high-pass filter in the transmitter output
  5599. c. a low-pass filter in the transmitter output
  5600. d. a band-pass filter to the speech amplifier
  5601. ==================
  5602. 23. A high-pass filter can be used to:
  5603. a. prevent interference to a telephone
  5604. b. prevent overmodulation in a transmitter
  5605. c. prevent interference to a TV receiver
  5606. d. pass a band of speech frequencies in a modulator
  5607. ==================
  5608. 24. A high-pass RF filter would normally be fitted:
  5609. a. between transmitter output and feedline
  5610. b. at the antenna terminals of a TV receiver
  5611. c. at the Morse key or keying relay in a transmitter
  5612. d. between microphone and speech amplifier
  5613. ==================
  5614. 25. A high-pass filter attenuates:
  5615. a. a band of frequencies in the VHF region
  5616. b. all except a band of VHF frequencies
  5617. c. high frequencies but not low frequencies
  5618. d. low frequencies but not high frequencies
  5619. ==================
  5620. 26. An operational amplifier connected as a filter always utilises:
  5621. a. positive feedback to reduce oscillation
  5622. b. negative feedback
  5623. c. random feedback
  5624. d. inductors and resistor circuits only
  5625. ==================
  5626. 27. The voltage gain of an operational amplifier at low frequencies is:
  5627. a. very high but purposely reduced using circuit components
  5628. b. very low but purposely increased using circuit components
  5629. c. less than one
  5630. d. undefined
  5631. ==================
  5632. 28. The input impedance of an operational amplifier is generally:
  5633. a. very high
  5634. b. very low
  5635. c. capacitive
  5636. d. inductive
  5637. ==================
  5638. 29. An active audio low-pass filter could be constructed using:
  5639. a. zener diodes and resistors
  5640. b. electrolytic capacitors and resistors
  5641. c. an operational amplifier, resistors and capacitors
  5642. d. a transformer and capacitors
  5643. ==================
  5644. 30. A filter used to attenuate a very narrow band of frequencies centred on 3.6 MHz
  5645. would be called:
  5646. a. a band-pass filter
  5647. b. a high-pass filter
  5648. c. a low-pass filter
  5649. d. a notch filter
  5650. ==================
  5651. 217
  5652. 218
  5653. Section 30 Digital Communications
  5654. Contributed by Murray Greenman ZL1BPU
  5655. The original digital means of electrical communication was the Morse code. It is still in use today as a very successful method for transferring information by means other than voice. Today Morse has been joined by some other methods each with its own advantages and disadvantages.
  5656. RTTY, AMTOR, PACTOR, PSK31, Packet Radio and other modes have all been given a great boost with the arrival of the computer as a generally available appliance. In fact some of the new modes would be impossible without the computer and the PC sound card. The advent of satellites with store and forward facilities has also enhanced digital operations.
  5657. It is now possible to pass information to many parts of the world with a hand-held transceiver, modem, and computer, and also to have real-time conversations around the world using an HF radio and a computer. Each of these means of digital communication has its own protocol.
  5658. How Digital Modes are Generated
  5659. Two common digital coding schemes are used; the ITU-R ITA2 alphabet, (often misnamed the "Baudot code"), and the ITU-R ITA5 alphabet (or ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange). ITA2 codes each character as a number between 0 and 31 to represent the various letters, digits and punctuation marks. To fit more than 32 different characters into the code, most numbers are used twice, and a special character (a "shift" character) is used to switch between the two meanings. The number can be represented by a 5-digit binary number (e.g. 14 = 01110 in binary). RTTY is one of the few systems that use the ITA2 alphabet today.
  5660. The ITA5 alphabet has 128 combinations, so a comprehensive alphabet, including lower and upper case letters, can be represented in seven binary bits. ITA-5 is used by PACTOR, packet radio and many other modes. Some digital modes (such as Morse!) use a scheme called a Varicode where the different characters are represented as numbers of different lengths. If the more frequently used characters are shorter, the transmission of plain text is therefore more efficient.
  5661. 
  5662. 219
  5663. The numbers to be transmitted must then be modulated onto a radio signal in some way. There are three main properties of a radio signal; frequency, phase and strength (amplitude), so there are three common modulation methods, and some modes use a combination of two or more of these. Many modes are transmitted using Frequency Shift Keying (FSK). This in principle consists of switching between two adjacent frequencies which are used to designate the "0" or "1" data bits. The two tones must maintain a fixed frequency separation or shift and of course the radio frequencies must also be stable. The most common shifts used by amateurs on HF for FSK are 170 Hz and 200 Hz. Wider shifts are used on VHF where data rates and signal bandwidths can be higher. Other modes use more tones (Multiple Frequency Shift Keying, MFSK), or one of the other techniques, such as Phase Shift Keying (PSK), where the phase of the tone or carrier is varied, or Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK), where the signal strength is varied or even keyed on and off.
  5664. To send a character over the radio, one bit (binary digit), 0 or 1, is assigned to one of two states, or if there are more than two possible states (say if there are four tones or four PSK phases), then two or more bits at a time may define the state to transmit. The data changes the properties of the signal to be transmitted (i.e. modulates the signal), as each state is fed successively to the transmitter modulator, to define and transmit each symbol.
  5665. For the receiving end to be able to accurately decode the characters sent, the bits must be sent at a constant speed. The signalling speed of serial data transmissions on wires is measured in bits per second (bps), since the bits are always sent one at a time. However, the signalling speed on a radio link is not measured in bits, but in symbols per second (the unit of symbols/sec is the baud). The symbol is the basic modulated signalling entity on a radio link, and represents the state of each signalling interval. Each symbol may carry one or more (or even less) data bits, depending on the modulation technique. For RTTY, each symbol (a short duration of one tone or another) carries one data bit, so the speed in bps is the same as the baud rate.
  5666. The device that produces a modulated tone symbol for each data state, or creates a data state for each received tone symbol, is called a modem (a modulator /demodulator). The modem may be a special separate unit rather like a telephone modem, or sometimes the modulation is performed directly on a transmitter oscillator or a modulator, and a separate modem device may not be necessary except perhaps for receiving. Equally, the function of a modem now often takes place in a computer sound card, with the signals fed from it and to it by an SSB transceiver.
  5667. RTTY (Radio TeleTYpe) is one of the oldest of the machine-generated digital modes. It does not necessarily require a computer, as it is simple enough to be handled by a mechanical device similar to a typewriter - a teleprinter. RTTY, like most other digital modes, works by encoding characters into a digital alphabet.
  5668. Common speeds used by amateurs for RTTY are: 45.5, 50 and 75 baud, equivalent to 60 wpm, 66 wpm, and 100 wpm. (There are five letters and a space in the average "word").
  5669. AMTOR is a form of RTTY, now little used, that uses error checking to ensure that the data sent is received correctly. The message being sent is broken up into groups of three characters each. A special alphabet is used which has seven bits per character; every valid character always has a 4:3 ratio of 0s and 1s. This small packet is then transmitted through the modem to the radio. AMTOR always operates at 100 baud and uses 170 Hz shift FSK.
  5670. The system can operate in two modes, mode A and mode B. Mode A uses Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) to ask the sending station to resend any packets that are not received properly (correct 4:3 ratio) once contact is established. Mode B sends the data twice, and checks the data but will not ask for a repeat. It is used for establishing contact (i.e. calling CQ) and for net and bulletin transmissions.
  5671. 220
  5672. Packet Radio is an ARQ system like AMTOR, but with more powerful error checking and message handling abilities. Larger packets are used, and encoded in each packet are the sender and destination addresses, and a very efficient error detection scheme called a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).
  5673. The Packet protocol allows a limited number of stations to carry on independent conversations on the same frequency without interference. The effective communication rate will be reduced if many stations are using the same frequency and excessive packet collisions occur.
  5674. Packets are assembled and prepared for transmission by a Terminal Node Controller (TNC), which manages the packet radio protocol and also contains a modem. The individual characters are usually in the ASCII alphabet, and a packet protocol called AX25 is usually used. The assembled packet is then passed to the modem and a radio in the same way as AMTOR or PACTOR.
  5675. Packet radio allows automated message forwarding throughout the world. Most activity is on VHF and higher bands where more stable propagation prevails and FM transmitters and receivers are used.
  5676. Large cities are centres of activity and cities are connected to each other by a series of relay stations. For longer distances the cities are connected by HF links (using PACTOR) or via internet or satellite gateways. Store-and-forward relaying is used. Most cities have a Bulletin Board System (BBS) for packet radio users. These can be used for the circulation of amateur radio information. They can be accessed by stations comprising a home computer, a simple modem and a VHF FM transceiver.
  5677. Another popular application of Packet Radio and AX25 is a telemetry technique sometimes called the Automatic Position Reporting System (APRS), although it is used for much more than reporting position. Stations with information to pass on send regular standard format messages in the manner of a beacon, which can be retransmitted by other stations. Applications of this type do not use bi-directional error correction, but do use automatic forwarding much the same as conventional packet systems.
  5678. PACTOR is derived from AMTOR. Like AMTOR it is a two-way error correcting system, but PACTOR dynamically adapts to conditions, switching from 100 baud to 200 baud. PACTOR can accept a series of imperfect data packets and reassemble them into the correct text. A recent version of PACTOR, called PACTOR II, uses the same protocol, but uses PSK modulation for even higher performance.
  5679. PSK31 is the most popular of the new digital modes. It is used like RTTY, for live keyboard-to-keyboard contacts. It uses differential binary PSK modulation at 31.25 baud. It is easy to tune in and to operate. The signal is very narrow (only 50Hz) and the performance very good, due to the high sensitivity and noise rejection of the PSK technique. PSK31 uses advanced digital signal processing (DSP), and can be run on many computer platforms, including Windows with a SoundBlaster type soundcard. The software is available free.
  5680. All you need to get going is a stable HF SSB Transceiver of conventional design, and a computer with a soundcard. You run two shielded audio cables between the rig and the sound card. The computer with its soundcard does the job of the modem. You can download FREE software from a web page. When all is set up, you have a live-keyboard system for chatting with other HF stations around the world. This is a really exciting mode. You can get further details about PSK31 from: http://aintel.bi.ehu.es/psk31.html
  5681. Other modes: There are numerous other digital modes in use, and more being introduced all the time. Many of these are designed for specific applications. For example, MFSK16 was designed for very long distance low power real-time conversations, and also is most effective on lower bands with strong multi-path reception and burst noise. CLOVER is an ARQ mode designed for reliable long distance file transfer under
  5682. 
  5683. 221
  5684. poor conditions, while MT63 was designed for net operation under severe interference. Some of these modes use interesting modulation methods such as single or multi-carrier Binary Phase Shift Keying BPSK, Quadrature Phase Shift Keying QPSK, or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex OFDM. There are even special modes for moon-bounce, auroral signals, very weak LF comunications and satellite operation. Many of these new modes also use a simple sound card modem and free software.
  5685. Don't overlook Hellschreiber. This is a mode with an interesting history. Hellschreiber is a method for sending text by radio or telephone line that involves dividing each text character into little pieces and sending them as dots. Hellschreiber was invented by the German inventor, Rudolf Hell who patented Hellschreiber in 1929.
  5686. The same SSB transceiver and computer set-up used for PSK31 can be used for Hellschreiber. Most Hellschreiber operation uses ASK modulation at 122.5 baud. You can check out the world of Hell on the web site at: http://www.qsl.net/zl1bpu and download the latest Hell software from there.
  5687. Hellschreiber is becoming popular with HF digital operators, as it provides very good performance with simple equipment and is easy to use. Its application is as a point-to-point mode for live contacts in a similar way to RTTY and PSK31. Modern variations such as PSK-Hell and FM-Hell provide even better performance with features to overcome specific ionospheric limitations of other digital modes.
  5688. Digital Modes and Propagation
  5689. While sensitivity and therefore rejection of Broadband Noise is an important property of digital modes, there are other specific ionospheric problems that affect digital modes more than is apparent on either Morse or voice modes. Burst Noise (electrical machinery, lightning) causes errors, interferes with synchronisation of data modes and impedes error correction systems, while Carrier Interference, (TV and mains harmonics, other radio transmissions) will obviously impair reception of most modes.
  5690. There are two other effects which are not so obvious. Multi-path Reception, where the signal arrives from different paths through the ionosphere with different time delays, can have a devastating effect on digital modes such as RTTY, that no increase in transmitter power will correct. The best solution to this problem is to use a mode with a very low baud rate, such as MFSK16 or MT63, to limit the timing errors. Doppler Modulation, caused mostly by fast moving air streams in the ionosphere or the movement of the apparent reflective height through changes in ion density, also has a serious effect, changing especially the phase and even the frequency of signals. This is best countered by using higher baud rates, or avoiding PSK modes. Doppler can be a big problem with long distance PSK31 operation.
  5691. Because the requirements for best performance conflict to some extent, and there is no one mode which will defeat all the problems, however in all cases the use of an effective error correction system (designed for the conditions) will provide significant improvements. The best solution is to choose an appropriate mode for the conditions prevailing at the time.
  5692. Automatic Packet Reporting System (APRS) is an amateur radio-based system for real time tactical digital communications of information of immediate value in the local area. In addition, all such data is ingested into the APRS Internet system (APRS-IS) and distributed globally for ubiquitous and immediate access. Along with messages, alerts, announcements and bulletins, the most visible aspect of APRS is its map display. Anyone may place any object or information on his or her map, and it is distributed to all maps of all users in the local RF network or monitoring the area via the Internet. Any station, radio or object that has an attached GPS is automatically tracked. Other prominent map features are weather stations, alerts and objects and other map-related amateur radio volunteer activities including Search and Rescue and signal direction finding.
  5693. 
  5694. APRS has been developed since the late 1980s by Bob Bruninga, callsign WB4APR, currently a senior research engineer at the United States Naval Academy. He still maintains the main APRS website. The acronym "APRS" was derived from his callsign
  5695. Question File: 30. Digital Systems: (1 question)
  5696. 1. In the block diagram shown, the block designated "modem" is a:
  5697. a. modulator/demodulator
  5698. b. modulation emphasis unit
  5699. c. Morse demodulator
  5700. d. MOSFET de-emphasis unit
  5701. ==================
  5702. 2. In the block diagram shown, the "modem":
  5703. a. monitors the demodulated signals
  5704. b. de-emphasises the modulated data
  5705. c. translates digital signals to and from audio signals
  5706. d. determines the modulation protocol
  5707. ==================
  5708. 3. The following can be adapted for use as a modem:
  5709. a. an electronic keyer
  5710. b. a spare transceiver
  5711. c. a spare receiver
  5712. d. a computer sound-card
  5713. ==================
  5714. 4. The following are three digital communication modes:
  5715. a. DSBSC, P ACTOR, NBFM
  5716. b. AGC, FSK, Clover
  5717. c. PSK31, AFC, PSSN
  5718. d. AMTOR, P ACTOR, PSK31
  5719. ==================
  5720. 5. In digital communications, FSK stands for:
  5721. a. phase selection keying
  5722. b. final section keying
  5723. c. frequency shift keying
  5724. d. final signal keying
  5725. ==================
  5726. 222
  5727. 
  5728. 6. In digital communications, BPSK stands for:
  5729. a. binary phase shift keying
  5730. b. baseband polarity shift keying
  5731. c. band pass selective keying
  5732. d. burst pulse signal keying
  5733. ==================
  5734. 7. When your HF digital transmission is received with errors due to multi-path
  5735. conditions, you should:
  5736. a. increase transmitter power
  5737. b. reduce transmitted baud rate
  5738. c. reduce transmitter power
  5739. d. change frequency slightly
  5740. ==================
  5741. 8. The letters BBS stand for:
  5742. a. binary baud system
  5743. b. bulletin board system
  5744. c. basic binary selector
  5745. d. broadcast band stopper
  5746. ==================
  5747. 9. APRS is an adaption of packet radio. APRS stands for
  5748. a. Automatic Packet Reporting System
  5749. b. Amateur Position Reporting System
  5750. c. Automatic Packet Relay System
  5751. d. Amateur Position Relay System
  5752. ==================
  5753. 10. The following communication mode is generally used for connecting to a VHF
  5754. packet radio bulletin board:
  5755. a. SSB
  5756. b. AM
  5757. c. FM
  5758. d. DSB
  5759. ==================
  5760. 223
  5761. 224
  5762. Sample NZART Exam Paper #1
  5763. 1. New Zealand's views on international radio regulatory matters are coordinated by the:
  5764. a. New Zealand Association of Radio Transmitters (NZART)
  5765. b. Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment (MBIE)
  5766. c. International Amateur Radio Union (IARU)
  5767. d. Prime Minister's Office
  5768. 2. If the licensed operator of an amateur radio station is absent overseas, the home station may be used by:
  5769. a. any member of the immediate family to maintain contact with only the licensed operator
  5770. b. any person with an appropriate amateur radio licence
  5771. c. the immediate family to communicate with any amateur radio operator
  5772. d. the immediate family if a separate licence for mobile use has been obtained by the
  5773. absent operator
  5774. 3. If you transmit from another amateur's station, the person responsible for its proper operation is:
  5775. a. both of you
  5776. b. the other amateur (the station licensee)
  5777. c. you, the operator
  5778. d. the station licensee, unless the station records show that you were the operator at
  5779. the time
  5780. 4. Peak envelope power (PEP) output is the:
  5781. a. average power output at the crest of the modulating cycle
  5782. b. total power contained in each sideband
  5783. c. carrier power output
  5784. d. transmitter power output on key-up condition
  5785. 225
  5786. 5. A licensee of an amateur radio station may permit anyone to:
  5787. a. use the station to communicate with other radio amateurs
  5788. b. pass brief messages of a personal nature provided no fees or other consideration
  5789. are requested or accepted
  5790. c. operate the amateur station under the supervision and in the presence of the
  5791. licensee
  5792. d. take part in communications only if prior written permission is received from the
  5793. MBIE
  5794. 6. Messages from an amateur station in one of the following are expressly forbidden:
  5795. a. ASCII
  5796. b. International No. 2 code
  5797. c. Baudot code
  5798. d. secret cipher
  5799. 7. Bandplans showing the transmission modes for New Zealand amateur radio bands are developed and published for the mutual respect and advantage of all operators:
  5800. a. to ensure that your operations do not impose problems on other operators and that their operations do not impact on you
  5801. b. to keep experimental developments contained
  5802. c. to reduce the number of modes in any one band
  5803. d. to keep overseas stations separate from local stations
  5804. 8. The frequency limits of the “10 metre band” are:
  5805. a. 28.00 to 28.35 MHz
  5806. b. 28.00 to 28.40 MHz
  5807. c. 28.00 to 29.00 MHz
  5808. d. 28.00 to 29.70 MHz
  5809. 9. The band 50 to 51 MHz is available to:
  5810. a. amateur radio operators subject to special conditions
  5811. b. all amateur radio operators as part of the 6 metre band
  5812. c. television broadcasting only
  5813. d. radio broadcasting stations only
  5814. 226
  5815. 10. In an atom:
  5816. a. the protons and the neutrons orbit the nucleus in opposite directions
  5817. b. the protons orbit around the neutrons
  5818. c. the electrons orbit the nucleus
  5819. d. the electrons and the neutrons orbit the nucleus
  5820. 11. In an n-type semiconductor, the current carriers are:
  5821. a. holes
  5822. b. electrons
  5823. c. positive ions
  5824. d. photons
  5825. 12. One kilohm is:
  5826. a. 10 ohm
  5827. b. 0.01 ohm
  5828. c. 0.001 ohm
  5829. d. 1000 ohm
  5830. 13. The voltage to cause a current of 4.4 ampere in a 50 ohm resistance is:
  5831. a. 2220 volt
  5832. b. 220 volt
  5833. c. 22.0 volt
  5834. d. 0.222 volt
  5835. 14. A current of 0.5 ampere flows through a resistor when 12 volt is applied. The value of the resistor is:
  5836. a. 6 ohms
  5837. b. 12.5 ohms
  5838. c. 17 ohms
  5839. d. 24 ohms
  5840. 227
  5841. 15. Six identical 2-volt bulbs are connected in series. The supply voltage to cause the bulbs to light normally is:
  5842. a. 12V
  5843. b. 1.2 V
  5844. c. 6V
  5845. d. 2V
  5846. 16. Five 10 ohm resistors connected in series give a total resistance of:
  5847. a. 1 ohm
  5848. b. 5 ohms
  5849. c. 10 ohms
  5850. d. 50 ohms
  5851. 17. Two 33 ohm resistors are connected in series with a power supply. If the current flowing is 100 mA, the voltage across one of the resistors is:
  5852. a. 66 volt
  5853. b. 33 volt
  5854. c. 3.3 volt
  5855. d. 1 volt
  5856. 18. A current of 500 milliamp passes through a 1000 ohm resistance. The power dissipated is:
  5857. a. 0.25 watt
  5858. b. 2.5 watt
  5859. c. 25 watt
  5860. d. 250 watt
  5861. 19. The following two electrical units multiplied together give the unit "watt":
  5862. a. volt and ampere
  5863. b. volt and farad
  5864. c. farad and henry
  5865. d. ampere and henry
  5866. 228
  5867. 20. The correct name for the equivalent of 'one cycle per second' is one:
  5868. a. henry
  5869. b. volt
  5870. c. hertz
  5871. d. coulomb
  5872. 21. A radio component is identified as a capacitor if its value is measured in:
  5873. a. microvolts
  5874. b. millihenrys
  5875. c. megohms
  5876. d. microfarads
  5877. 22. An inductor and a capacitor are connected in series. At the resonant frequency the resulting impedance is:
  5878. a. maximum
  5879. b. minimum
  5880. c. totally reactive
  5881. d. totally inductive
  5882. 23. The correct colour coding for the earth wire in a flexible mains lead is:
  5883. a. brown
  5884. b. blue
  5885. c. yellow and green
  5886. d. white
  5887. 24. Zener diodes are normally used as:
  5888. a. RF detectors
  5889. b. AF detectors
  5890. c. current regulators
  5891. d. voltage regulators
  5892. 229
  5893. 25. A transistor can be destroyed in a circuit by:
  5894. a. excessive light
  5895. b. excessive heat
  5896. c. saturation
  5897. d. cut-off
  5898. 26. In the figure shown, 3 represents the:
  5899. a. source of an n-channel junction FET
  5900. b. gate of a p-channel junction FET
  5901. c. emitter of a pnp transistor
  5902. d. drain of an n-channel junction FET
  5903. 27. An ammeter should not be connected directly across the terminals of a 12 volt car battery because:
  5904. a. the resulting high current will probably destroy the ammeter
  5905. b. no current will flow because no other components are in the circuit
  5906. c. the battery voltage will be too low for a measurable current to flow
  5907. d. the battery voltage will be too high for a measurable current to flow
  5908. 28. The input to an amplifier is 1 volt rms and output 100 volt rms. This is an increase of:
  5909. a. 10 dB
  5910. b. 20 dB
  5911. c. 40 dB
  5912. d. 100 dB
  5913. 
  5914. 29. In the block diagram shown, the "antenna tuner":
  5915. a. adjusts the resonant frequency of the antenna to minimize harmonic radiation
  5916. b. adjusts the resonant frequency of the antenna to maximise power output
  5917. c. changes the standing-wave-ratio on the transmission line to the antenna
  5918. d. adjusts the impedance of the antenna system seen at the transceiver output
  5919. 30. In the block diagram of the receiver shown, most of the receiver gain is in the:
  5920. a. RF amplifier
  5921. b. IF amplifier
  5922. c. AF amplifier
  5923. d. mixer
  5924. 230
  5925. 
  5926. 231
  5927. 31. In this receiver, an audio frequency gain control would be associated with the block labelled:
  5928. a. AF amplifier
  5929. b. frequency demodulator
  5930. c. speaker, phones
  5931. d. IF amplifier
  5932. 32. The ability of a receiver to separate signals close in frequency is called its:
  5933. a. noise figure
  5934. b. sensitivity
  5935. c. bandwidth
  5936. d. selectivity
  5937. 33. A 7 MHz signal and a 16 MHz oscillator are applied to a mixer stage. The output will contain the input frequencies and:
  5938. a. 8and9MHz
  5939. b. 7and9MHz
  5940. c. 9and23MHz
  5941. d. 3.5 and 9 MHz
  5942. 34. A superhet receiver, with an IF at 500 kHz, is receiving a 14 MHz signal. The local oscillator frequency is:
  5943. a. 14.5 MHz
  5944. b. 19 MHz
  5945. c. 500 kHz
  5946. d. 28 MHz
  5947. 
  5948. 35. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "linear amplifier":
  5949. a. has all components arranged in-line
  5950. b. amplifies the modulated signal with no distortion
  5951. c. aligns the two sidebands correctly
  5952. d. removes any unwanted amplitude modulation from the signal
  5953. 36. In the transmitter block diagram shown, the "speech amplifier":
  5954. a. amplifies the audio signal from the microphone
  5955. b. is a spectral equalization entropy changer
  5956. c. amplifies only speech, while discriminating against background noises
  5957. d. shifts the frequency spectrum of the audio signal into the RF region
  5958. 37. The driver stage of a transmitter is located:
  5959. a. before the power amplifier
  5960. b. between oscillator and buffer
  5961. c. with the frequency multiplier
  5962. d. after the output low-pass filter circuit
  5963. 38. Harmonics produced in an early stage of a transmitter may be reduced in a later stage by:
  5964. a. increasing the signal input to the final stage
  5965. b. using FET power amplifiers
  5966. c. using tuned circuit coupling between stages
  5967. d. using larger value coupling capacitors
  5968. 232
  5969. 
  5970. 39. Transmitter power amplifiers can generate parasitic oscillations on:
  5971. a. the transmitter's output frequency
  5972. b. harmonics of the transmitter's output frequency
  5973. c. frequencies unrelated to the transmitter's output frequency
  5974. d. VHF frequencies only
  5975. 40. A halfwave DC power supply operates from the New Zealand AC mains. The ripple frequency will be:
  5976. a. 25 Hz
  5977. b. 50 Hz
  5978. c. 70 Hz
  5979. d. 100 Hz
  5980. 41. The block marked 'Rectifier' in the diagram is to:
  5981. a. turn the AC voltage from the transformer into a fluctuating DC voltage
  5982. b. rectify any waveform errors introduced by the transformer
  5983. c. turn the sinewave output of the rectifier into a square wave
  5984. d. remove any AC components from the output of the transformer
  5985. 42. A rare DX station calling CQ on CW and repeating "up 2" at the end of the call means the station:
  5986. a. will be listening for replies 2 kHz higher in frequency
  5987. b. will reply only to stations sending at greater than 20 wpm
  5988. c. is about to shift his calling frequency 2 kHz higher
  5989. d. will wait more than 2 seconds before replying to his call
  5990. 233
  5991. 
  5992. 234
  5993. 43. "Break-in keying" means:
  5994. a. unauthorised entry has resulted in station equipment disappearing
  5995. b. temporary emergency operating
  5996. c. key-down changes the station to transmit, key-up to receive
  5997. d. the other station's keying is erratic
  5998. 44. A noise blanker on a receiver is most effective to reduce:
  5999. a. 50 Hz power supply hum
  6000. b. noise originating from the mixer stage of the receiver
  6001. c. ignition noise
  6002. d. noise originating from the RF stage of the receiver.
  6003. 45. The signal "QSY?" means:
  6004. a. shall I change to transmission on another frequency?
  6005. b. shall I increase transmitter power?
  6006. c. shall I relay to .... ?
  6007. d. is my signal fading?
  6008. 46. The designed output impedance of the antenna socket of most modern transmitters is nominally:
  6009. a. 25 ohm
  6010. b. 50 ohm
  6011. c. 75 ohm
  6012. d. 100 ohm
  6013. 47. This commonly available antenna feedline can be buried directly in the ground for some distance without adverse effects:
  6014. a. 75 ohm twinlead
  6015. b. 300 ohm twinlead
  6016. c. 600 ohm open-wire
  6017. d. coaxial cable
  6018. 
  6019. 235
  6020. 48. The antenna in this diagram can be made to operate on several bands if the following item is installed at the points shown at 'X' in each wire:
  6021. a. a capacitor
  6022. b. an inductor
  6023. c. a fuse
  6024. d. a parallel-tuned trap
  6025. 49. The effect of adding a series inductance to an antenna is to:
  6026. a. increase the resonant frequency
  6027. b. have no change on the resonant frequency
  6028. c. have little effect
  6029. d. decrease the resonant frequency
  6030. 50. This property of an antenna broadly defines the range of frequencies to which it will be effective:
  6031. a. bandwidth
  6032. b. front-to-back ratio
  6033. c. impedance
  6034. d. polarisation
  6035. 51. A more important consideration when selecting an antenna for working stations at great distances is:
  6036. a. sunspot activity
  6037. b. angle of radiation
  6038. c. impedance
  6039. d. bandwidth
  6040. 52. The 'skywave' is another name for the:
  6041. a. ionospheric wave
  6042. b. tropospheric wave
  6043. c. ground wave
  6044. d. inverted wave
  6045. 236
  6046. 53. Scattered patches of high ionisation developed seasonally at the height of one of the layers is called:
  6047. a. sporadic-E
  6048. b. patchy
  6049. c. random reflectors
  6050. d. trans-equatorial ionisation
  6051. 54. A variation in received signal strength caused by slowly changing differences in path lengths is called:
  6052. a. absorption
  6053. b. fading
  6054. c. fluctuation
  6055. d. path loss
  6056. 55. The skip distance of a sky wave will be greatest when the:
  6057. a. ionosphere is most densely ionised
  6058. b. signal given out is strongest
  6059. c. angle of radiation is smallest
  6060. d. polarisation is vertical
  6061. 56. When a HF transmitted radio signal reaches a receiver, small changes in the ionosphere can cause:
  6062. a. consistently stronger signals
  6063. b. a change in the ground wave signal
  6064. c. variations in signal strength
  6065. d. consistently weaker signals
  6066. 57. Narrow-band interference can be caused by:
  6067. a. transmitter harmonics
  6068. b. a neon sign
  6069. c. a shaver motor
  6070. d. lightning flashes
  6071. 237
  6072. 58. Cross-modulation of a broadcast receiver by a nearby transmitter would be noticed in the receiver as:
  6073. a. a lack of signals being received
  6074. b. the undesired signal in the background of the desired signal
  6075. c. interference only when a broadcast signal is received
  6076. d. distortion on transmitted voice peaks
  6077. 59. Television interference caused by harmonics radiated from an amateur transmitter could be eliminated by fitting:
  6078. a. a low-pass filter in the TV receiver antenna input
  6079. b. a high-pass filter in the transmitter output
  6080. c. a low-pass filter in the transmitter output
  6081. d. a band-pass filter to the speech amplifier
  6082. 60. "ITA2" is:
  6083. a. a 5 bit alphabet used for digital communications
  6084. b. Morse code sent such that the baud speed is equal to the dot speed
  6085. c. a coding system identifying modulation types
  6086. d. an error correction code
  6087. Sample Exam 1 Answers
  6088. 238
  6089. Question Answer ------------ Question Answer ------------
  6090. 1b 31a 2b 32d 3c 33c 4a 34a 5b 35b 6d 36a 7a 37a 8d 38c 9a 39c
  6091. 10c 40b 11b 41a 12d 42a 13b 43c 14d 44c 15a 45a 16d 46b 17c 47d 18d 48d 19a 49d 20c 50a 21d 51b 22b 52a 23c 53a 24d 54b 25b 55c 26d 56c 27a 57a 28c 58b 29d 59c 30b 60a
  6092. 
  6093. Question Pool Answers Section 1
  6094. 1C 2C 3B 4C 5A 6A 7D 8A 9A 10 D 11 B 12 C
  6095. Section 2
  6096. 1D 2B 3B 4C
  6097. Section 3
  6098. 1D 2C 3C 4A
  6099. Section 4
  6100. 13A 25B 14A 26B 15B 27D 16A 28C 17D 29D 18D 30D 19C 31D 20D 32A 21D 33C 22C 34D 23C 35B 24C 36C
  6101. 5D 9A 6C 10D 7D 11C 8B 12A
  6102. 5B 9C 6B 10B 7A 11A 8A 12D
  6103. 37A 49B 61C 38B 50C 62B 39D 51B 63C 40A 52A 64B 41C 53D 65A 42B 54D 66C 43D 55A 67D 44A 56A 68B 45B 57C 69C 46D 58B 70B 47B 59C
  6104. 48B 60D
  6105. 13A 17B 14B 18D 15A 19C 16A 20C
  6106. 13C 17B 14A 18D 15B 19C 16D 20D
  6107. 1D3C5A7B9B
  6108. 2D 4D
  6109. Section 5
  6110. 1C 5B 2A 6D 3B 7D 4A 8A
  6111. 6A 8C 10C
  6112. 9B 13D 17D 10B 14D 18D 11A 15A 19D 12B 16D 20A
  6113. 239
  6114. Section 6
  6115. 1A 7D 2D 8A 3B 9C 4C 10 A 5C 11 A 6A 12 B
  6116. Section 7
  6117. 1C 5B 2A 6D 3B 7A 4C 8A
  6118. Section 8
  6119. 13D 19A 25A 14C 20C 26B 15A 21C 27B 16D 22A 28C 17D 23D 29C 18B 24C 30A
  6120. 9D 13B 17B 10B 14A 18D 11B 15D 19C 12A 16C 20A
  6121. 1A3D5D7C9D
  6122. 2B 4B
  6123. Section 9
  6124. 1A 5A 2A 6A 3D 7D 4A 8B
  6125. Section 10
  6126. 6C 8D 10B
  6127. 9A 13A 17A 10B 14A 18C 11B 15B 19B 12C 16B 20B
  6128. 1D3A5A7A9C
  6129. 2B 4B
  6130. Section 11
  6131. 1B 5D 2D 6A 3A 7C 4C 8D
  6132. 6B 8B 10B
  6133. 9B 13B 17B 10C 14B 18B 11C 15C 19A 12D 16B 20D
  6134. 240
  6135. Section 12
  6136. 1C3A5C7A9C 2B 4D 6D 8D 10B
  6137. Section 13
  6138. 1A3C5B7A9A 2B 4C 6D 8C 10C
  6139. Section 14
  6140. 1D3C5B7A9B 2C 4D 6C 8C 10B
  6141. Section 15
  6142. 1B3A5A7A9A 2D 4C 6D 8B 10C
  6143. Section 16
  6144. 1C 5D 9B 13A 17D 2A 6D 10C 14B 18B 3C 7B 11A 15B 19B 4B 8C 12C 16A 20C
  6145. Section 17
  6146. 1A 7C 13D 19B 25B 2C 8D 14C 20D 26C 3B 9D 15B 21C 27A 4C 10D 16B 22A 28C 5C 11A 17C 23A 29C 6D 12A 18C 24D 30B
  6147. 241
  6148. Section 18
  6149. 1C 5B 2B 6D 3C 7A 4C 8C
  6150. Section 19
  6151. 9B 13B 17B 10A 14C 18C 11A 15D 19C 12D 16A 20B
  6152. 1A3C5A7D9A
  6153. 2C 4D
  6154. Section 20
  6155. 1B 5B 2C 6C 3D 7D 4D 8B
  6156. Section 21
  6157. 6A 8B 10C
  6158. 9C 13B 17D 10A 14A 18C 11D 15A 19B 12B 16B 20C
  6159. 1B3A5D7B9C 2D 4A 6D 8B 10D
  6160. Section 22
  6161. 1B3C5C7A9C 2D 4A 6D 8C 10D
  6162. Section 23
  6163. 1A3A5B7A9A
  6164. 2B 4B
  6165. Section 24
  6166. 1B 5A 2C 6D 3C 7C 4A 8A
  6167. 6D 8B 10B
  6168. 9D 13B 17B 10B 14C 18C 11C 15D 19D 12A 16A 20A
  6169. 242
  6170. Section 25
  6171. 1C3D5A7A9A
  6172. 2B 4D
  6173. Section 26
  6174. 1C 5B 2C 6C 3D 7C 4B 8D
  6175. Section 27
  6176. 1A 9C 2B 10B 3C 11B 4C 12C 5D 13B 6A 14D 7C 15A 8D 16B
  6177. Section 28
  6178. 1B 11A 2C 12A 3B 13C 4D 14C 5D 15D 6A 16A 7C 17D 8C 18B 9B 19D 10 C 20D
  6179. Section 29
  6180. 1B 7D 2C 8B 3A 9D 4D 10A 5B 11A 6C 12B
  6181. 6B 8B 10B
  6182. 9C 13C 17C 10A 14D 18A 11A 15A 19D 12A 16A 20D
  6183. 17D 25B 33B 18D 26A 34C 19D 27C 35B 20A 28B 36C 21A 29B 37D 22B 30B 38D 23A 31C 39B 24A 32B 40A
  6184. 21D 31B 41A 22D 32B 42D 23D 33A 43B 24A 34C 44A 25C 35C 45C 26B 36C 46C 27A 37D 47B 28D 38D 48C 29B 39D 49A 30B 40B 50B
  6185. 13D 19A 25D 14B 20D 26B 15C 21B 27A 16B 22C 28A 17C 23C 29C 18A 24B 30D
  6186. 243
  6187. Section 30
  6188. 1A3D5C7B9A 2C 4D 6A 8B 10C
  6189. 244

comments powered by Disqus